CD RECEIVER
KD-APD38/KD-PDR30
KD-APD38/KD-PDR30
KD-APD38/KD-PDR30
RECEPTOR CON CD
RÉCEPTEUR CD
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.
Para cancelar la demostración en pantalla, consulte la página 6.
Pour annuler la démonstration des affichages, référez-vous à la page 6.
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.
Para la instalación y las conexiones, refiérase al manual separado.
Pour l’installation et les raccordements, se référer au manuel séparé.
For customer Use:
Enter below the Model
No. and Serial No. which
are located on the top or
bottom of the cabinet. Retain
this information for future
reference.
INSTRUCTIONS
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS
Model No.
Serial No.
GET0467-001A
[J]
How to reset your unit
CONTENTS
Control panel — KD-APD38/KD-PDR30 ........
4
5
Remote controller — RM-RK50 .............
Getting started................................
Basic operations...................................................
6
6
•
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.
Radio operations .............................
7
Disc operations................................
Playing a disc in the unit .....................................
8
8
How to forcibly eject a disc
iPod operations ............................... 11
Sound adjustments.......................... 13
General settings — PSM .................. 14
External component operations ....... 16
Maintenance ................................... 16
More about this unit ........................ 17
Troubleshooting.............................. 21
Specifications.................................. 23
•
•
Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.
If this does not work, reset your unit.
How to use the M MODE button
If you press M MODE, the unit goes into functions mode,
then the number buttons and 5/∞ buttons work as
different function buttons.
Ex.: When number button 2 works as MO (monaural)
button.
Detaching the control panel
To use these buttons for their original functions
again after pressing M MODE, wait for 5 seconds
without pressing any of these buttons until the
functions mode is cleared or press M MODE again.
Attaching the control panel
KD-APD38 is equipped with the steering wheel
remote control function.
• See the Installation/Connection Manual (separate
volume) for connection.
3
Control panel —
KD-APD38 / KD-PDR30
Parts identification
Display window
1
Control dial
o
;
a
s
RND (random) button
M MODE button
2 0 (eject) button
3
4
5
Loading slot
EQ (equalizer) button
DISP (display) button
(control panel release) button
Disc information indicators—
TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)
DISC indicator
Playback mode / item indicators— RND (random),
(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)
Tuner reception indicators—MO (monaural),
ST (stereo)
6 4 /¢ buttons
d
f
7
8
9
Display window
(standby/on attenuator) button
AUX (auxiliary) input jack
g
p 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons
q
w
e
r
SEL (select) button
BAND button
SRC (source) button
Remote sensor
DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).
MO (monaural) button
SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button
Number buttons
h
j
k
l
/
z
S.BASS (super bass) indicator
EQ (equalizer) indicator
Tr (track) indicator
Source display / Time countdown indicator
Main display
Sound mode (iEQ: intelligent equalizer)
indicators—JAZZ, ROCK, HIP HOP, CLASSIC, POPS,
USER
t
y
u
i
RPT (repeat) button
4
Main elements and features
Remote controller
—
RM-RK50
Installing the lithium coin battery
(CR2025)
1
(standby/on/attenuator) button
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or
attenuates the sound when the power is on.
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.
For USA-California Only:
This product contains a CR Coin Cell Lithium Battery
which contains Perchlorate Material—special
handling may apply.
2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons
• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.
• Changes the preset stations with D ∞.
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA discs.
• While listening to an Apple iPod.
– Pauses or resumes playback with D ∞.
– Enters the main menu with 5 U.
(Now 5 U/D ∞/2 R/F 3 work as the menu
selecting buttons.)*
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
Aim the remote controller directly at the remote
sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle
in between.
Warning:
3
VOL – / VOL + buttons
• Adjusts the volume level.
SOUND button
• Selects the sound mode (iEQ: intelligent
equalizer).
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or its
equivalent; otherwise, it may explode.
• Do not leave the remote controller in a place
(such as dashboards) exposed to direct sunlight
for a long time; otherwise, it may explode.
• Store the battery in a place where children cannot
reach to avoid risk of accident.
• To prevent the battery from over-heating,
cracking, or starting a fire:
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the
battery, or dispose of it in a fire.
– Do not leave the battery with other metallic
materials.
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or
similar tools.
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when
throwing away or saving it.
4
5
SOURCE button
• Selects the source.
6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and
held.
• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.
• While listening to an iPod (in menu selecting
mode):
– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then, press
D ∞ to confirm the selection.)
– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and held.
* 5 U : Returns to the previous menu.
D ∞ : Confirms the selection.
5
To drop the volume in a
moment (ATT)
Getting started
To restore the sound, press
the button again.
Basic operations
~ Turn on the power.
To turn off the power
Ÿ
Basic settings
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages 14 and
15.
1
2
1
*
You cannot select “CD” as the playback source
if there is no disc in the unit.
“NO IPOD” appears if iPod is not connected.
2
*
! For FM/AM tuner
1 Canceling the display demonstrations
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”
2 Setting the clock
Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust the hour.
Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then adjust the
minute.
⁄ Adjust the volume.
VOL 20
3
Finish the procedure.
Volume level appears.
@ Adjust the sound as you want. (See
To check the current clock time while the
power is turned off
page 13.)
Clock time is shown on the display for
about 5 seconds. See also page 14.
Caution on volume setting:
Discs produce very little noise compared with other
sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc
to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden
increase of the output level.
6
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to
receive
Radio operations
~
Lights up when monaural mode is activated.
Ÿ
MONO
Lights up when receiving an FM stereo
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.
Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.
88.3
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same
procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO indicator
goes off.
! Start searching for a station.
Storing stations in memory
When a station is received, searching stops.
To stop searching, press the same button
again.
You can preset six stations for each band.
FM station automatic presetting—
SSM (Strong-station Sequential
Memory)
To tune in to a station manually
In step ! above...
1
1
Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to
store into.
M
2
Select a desired station frequency.
2
3
SSM
“SSM” flashes, then disappears when automatic
presetting is over.
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are
searched and stored automatically in the FM band.
7
Manual presetting
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset
number 4 of the FM1 band.
Disc operations
Playing a disc in the unit
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the
source or eject the disc.
1
2
FM I 92.5
3
P4
92.5
Preset number flashes for a while.
To stop play and eject the disc
Listening to a preset station
• Press SRC to listen to another
playback source.
1
2
To fast-forward or reverse the track
To go to the next or previous tracks
Select the preset station (1 – 6) you want.
or
To go to the next or previous folders (only for
MP3 or WMA discs)
To check other information while listening
to the radio
Clock Ô Frequency
8
To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder
(for MP3 or WMA discs) directly
Other main functions
To select a number from 01 – 06:
Skipping tracks quickly during play
• For MP3 or WMA discs, you can skip tracks within the
same folder.
To select a number from 07 – 12:
Ex.: To select track 32 while playing a track whose
number is a single digit (1 to 9)
1
2
• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA discs, it
is required that folders are assigned with 2-digit
numbers at the beginning of their folder names—
01, 02, 03, and so on.
Each time you press the button, you can skip 10
tracks.
• After the last track, the first track will be selected
and vice versa.
To select a particular track in a folder
(for MP3 or WMA discs):
3
Prohibiting disc ejection
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.
NO EJECT
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same
procedure.
9
Changing the display information
While playing an audio CD or a CD Text
Selecting the playback modes
You can use only one of the following playback modes
at a time.
1
2
Select your desired playback mode.
Repeat play
7
While playing an MP3 or a WMA track
• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG ON”
(see page 15)
Mode
Plays repeatedly
TRK RPT
: The current track.
FLDR RPT* : All tracks of the current folder.
RPT OFF
: Cancels.
7
Random play
• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG OFF”
Mode
Plays at random
FLDR RND* : All tracks of the current folder,
then tracks of the next folder
and so on.
DISC RND
: All tracks of the current disc.
: Clock with the current track number
: Elapsed playing time with the current
track number
: Corresponding indicator lights up on
the display
RND OFF
: Cancels.
* Only while playing an MP3 or a WMA disc.
: Corresponding indicator lights up
on the display
1
2
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information,
folder name and file name appear. In this case, the
TAG indicator will not light up.
10
Caution:
iPod operations
You can play songs from an Apple iPod through this unit
by connecting it with the supplied connection cable for
iPod.
• Avoid using the iPod if it might hinder your safety
driving.
• Make sure all important data has been backed up
to avoid losing the data.
• Disconnecting the iPod will stop playback. Press SRC
to listen to another playback source.
To pause playback
• For connection, see Installation/Connection Manual
(separate volume).
• For details, refer also to the manual supplied with
your iPod.
To resume playback, press the
button again.
~ Connect an iPod.
To fast-forward or reverse the track
To go to the next or previous tracks
Connection cable for iPod
If an iPod has been connected...
Playback starts automatically from where it has
been paused previously.
Ÿ Adjust the volume.
! Adjust the sound as you want. (See
page 13.)
11
Selecting a track from the menu
Selecting the playback modes
1
2
Enter the main menu.
1
2
Select your desired playback mode.
7
Repeat play
Now the 5/∞/4 /¢ buttons work as
the menu selecting buttons*.
Mode
Playback functions (as on iPod)
Select the desired menu.
ONE RPT : Same as “Repeat One.”
ALL RPT
RPT OFF
: Same as “Repeat All.”
: Cancels.
7
Random play
PLAYLIST Ô ARTISTS Ô ALBUMS Ô
SONGS Ô GENRES Ô COMPOSER Ô
(back to the beginning)
Mode
Playback functions (as on iPod)
ALBM RND *: Same as “Shuffle Albums.”
3
Confirm the selection.
SONG RND : Same as “Shuffle Songs.”
RND OFF : Cancels.
To move back to the previous
menu, press 5.
* Functions only if you select “ALL” in “ALBUMS” of
the main “MENU.”
• If a track is selected, playback starts
automatically.
: Corresponding indicator lights up
on the display
• If the selected item has another layer, you will
enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the
desired track is played (see page 20).
• Holding 4 /¢ can skip 10 items at
a time.
To check other information while listening
to an iPod
* The menu selecting mode will be canceled:
– If no operations are done for about 5 seconds.
– When you confirm the selection of a track.
12
Indication, [Range]
BAS*2 (bass), [–06 to +06]
Sound adjustments
Adjust the bass.
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the
music genre (iEQ: intelligent equalizer).
MID*2 (mid-range), [–06 to +06]
Adjust the mid-range frequencies sound level.
TRE*2 (treble), [–06 to +06]
Adjust the treble.
FAD*3 (fader), [R06 to F06]
Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.
Preset values
BAS*1 M ID*2 TRE*3 S.BS*4
BAL*4 (balance), [L06 to R06]
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.
S.BS*2 (super bass), [S.BS ON or S.BS OFF],
[01 to 05, initial: 03]*5
Maintain the richness and fullness of the bass sound
regardless of how low you set the volume.
Indication (For)
USER
(Flat sound)
00
00
00
00
00 OFF
+02 ON
+03 OFF
ROCK
(Rock or disco music)
+03
+01
SUB.W*1 (subwoofer), [00 to 08, initial: 04]
Adjust the subwoofer output level.
CLASSIC
(Classical music)
VOL (volume), [00 to 30 or 50*6]
Adjust the volume.
POPS
(Light music)
+02 +01 +02 OFF
+04 –02 +01 ON
1
*
Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “WOOFER”
(see page 15).
HIP HOP
(Funk or rap music)
2
*
When you adjust the bass, mid-range, treble, or super
bass, the adjustment you have made is stored for the
currently selected sound mode (iEQ) including “USER.”
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader
level to “00.”
This adjustment will not affect the subwoofer output.
Range adjustment for super bass is adjustable only
when it is set to “S.BS ON.“
JAZZ
(Jazz music)
+03
00
+03 OFF
3
*
*1 : Bass; *2 : Mid-range; *3 : Treble; *4 : Super bass
4
5
*
*
Adjusting the sound
6
*
Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See
page 15 for details.)
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your
preference.
1
2
13
General settings — PSM
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items
listed in the table that follows.
3
Adjust the PSM item selected.
1
4
5
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other PSM
items if necessary.
2
Select a PSM item.
Finish the procedure.
Indications
Item
: Initial)
Setting, [reference page]
(
DEMO
• DEMO ON
:
Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no operation
Display
demonstration
is done for about 20 seconds, [6].
Cancels.
• DEMO OFF
• ON
:
:
CLK DISP*1
Clock display
Clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power is
turned off.
• OFF
:
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5 seconds
when the power is turned off, [6].
CLOCK H
Hour adjustment
1 – 12
00 – 59
[Initial: 1 (1:00)], [6].
CLOCK M
[Initial: 00 (1:00)], [6].
Minute adjustment
DIMMER
Dimmer
• ON
• OFF
:
:
Dims the display illumination.
Cancels.
SCROLL*2
Scroll
• ONCE
• AUTO
• OFF
:
:
:
Scrolls the track information once.
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).
Cancels.
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display
regardless of the setting.
1
*
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select “OFF” to
save the car’s battery.
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.
2
14
Indications
Item
Setting, [reference page]
(
: Initial)
L/O MODE
Line output mode
• REAR
:
:
Select if both the LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting the
speakers (through an external amplifier).
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting a
subwoofer (through an external amplifier).
• WOOFER
WOOFER*3
Subwoofer cutoff
frequency
• LOW
• MID
• HIGH
:
:
:
Frequencies lower than 90 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.
Frequencies lower than 135 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.
Frequencies lower than 180 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.
AUX ADJ
A.ADJ 00
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase of the
output level when changing the source from external component
connected to the AUX input jack on the control panel.
Auxiliary input level — A.ADJ 05
adjustment
TAG DISP
Tag display
• TAG ON
• TAG OFF
:
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [10].
Cancels.
AMP GAIN
Amplifier gain
control
• LOW PWR
:
VOL 00 – VOL 30. (Select this if the maximum power of the speaker is
less than 50 W to prevent damaging the speaker.)
VOL 00 – VOL 50.
• HIGH PWR
:
:
AREA
Tuner channel
interval
• AREA US
When using in North/Central/South America. AM/FM intervals are set
to 10 kHz/200 kHz.
When using in any other areas except North/Central/South America.
AM/FM intervals are set to 9 kHz/50 kHz (100 kHz during auto search).
When using in South American countries. AM/FM intervals are set to
10 kHz/100 kHz.
• AREA EU
:
:
• AREA SA
IF BAND
Intermediate
frequency band
• AUTO
• WIDE
:
:
Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises between
close stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)
Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but sound
quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.
3
*
Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “WOOFER.”
15
Maintenance
External component
operations
You can connect an external component to the AUX
(auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.
How to clean the connectors
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.
Connector
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in
the following cases:
• After starting the heater in the car.
~
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a
few hours until the moisture evaporates.
Ÿ Turn on the connected component and
start playing the source.
! Adjust the volume.
How to handle discs
When removing a disc from its
case, press down the center holder
of the case and lift the disc out,
holding it by the edges.
Center holder
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its
recording surface.
When storing a disc into its case, gently insert the
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface
facing up).
⁄ Adjust the sound as you want. (See
page 13.)
To check other information while listening
to an external component
• Make sure to store discs into the cases after use.
Clock Ô AUX IN
16
To keep discs clean
More about this unit
Basic operations
A dirty disc may not play correctly.
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with
a soft cloth in a straight line from center
to edge.
Turning on the power
• Do not use any solvent (for example, conventional
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean
discs.
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the
power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.
Turning off the power
• If you turn off the power while listening to a track,
playback starts from where playback it has been
stopped previously, next time you turn on the power.
To play new discs
New discs may have some rough spots
around the inner and outer edges. If
such a disc is used, this unit may reject
the disc.
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.
General
• If you change the source while listening to a disc or
an iPod, playback stops.
Next time you select “CD” or “IPOD” as the playback
source, playback starts from where it has been
stopped/paused previously.
• After ejecting a disc or disconnecting an iPod,
“NO DISC” or “NO IPOD” appears and you cannot
operate some of the buttons. Insert another disc,
reconnect an iPod, or press SRC to select another
playback source.
Do not use the following discs:
Warped disc
Sticker
Sticker residue
Tuner operations
Storing stations in memory
• During SSM search...
– All previously stored stations are erased and
stations are stored newly.
Stick-on label
Unusual shape
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).
– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will
be automatically tuned in.
Single CD—8 cm
(3-3/16”) disc
• When storing a station manually, the previously
preset station is erased when a new station is stored
in the same preset number.
Continued on the next page
17
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective seal stuck
to the surface.
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an
ink jet printer.
Using these discs under high temperatures or high
humidities may cause malfunctions or damage to the
unit.
Disc operations
Caution for DualDisc playback
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on
this product may not be recommended.
General
• This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs/CD
Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs (Rewritable)
in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3 and WMA formats.
• When a disc is inserted upside down, “PLEASE” and
“EJECT” appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to
eject the disc.
• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are
used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or
WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.
Playing an MP3/WMA disc
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of
the letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No
other characters can be correctly displayed.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the
conditions below:
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
• This unit can play back only files of the same type
which are first detected if a disc includes both audio
CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this
unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the
following reasons:
– Sampling frequency:
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Romeo,
Joliet, Windows long file name
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder
names vary among the disc format used (includes 4
extension characters—<.mp3> or <.wma>).
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters
– Romeo: up to 128 characters
– Discs are dirty or scratched.
– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens inside
the unit.
– Joliet: up to 64 characters
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.
– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are written with
“Packet Write” method.
– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of 200
folders, and of 8 hierarchies.
– There are improper recording conditions (missing
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,
warped, etc.).
CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular CDs.
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable
bit rate).
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed
time display, and do not show the actual elapsed
time. Especially, after performing the search function,
this difference becomes noticeable.
•
18
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and
voice format.
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod is charged
through this unit.
• While the iPod is connected, all operations from the
iPod are disabled. Perform all operations from this
unit.
• While connecting an iPod with Video:
– No video shows on the iPod’s display or the
external monitor (only the audio part is available).
– It is not possible to browse video files on the
“Video“ menu. (If you connect the iPod during
playback or pausing of a video file, resuming
playback will not work.)
– WMA files which are not based upon Windows
Media Audio.
®
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have the data such as AIFF, ATRAC3, etc.
• The search function works but search speed is not
constant.
• iPod shuffle is not controllable.
• You can control the iPod from this unit when “JVC” or
Ejecting a disc
“
” appears on the iPod display.
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,
the disc is automatically inserted again into the
loading slot to protect it from dust. Playback starts
automatically.
• The songs order displayed on the selecting menu of
this unit may differ from the iPod.
• If playback is stopped, select a track from the
selecting menu or press ∞.
• The text information may not be displayed correctly.
– Some characters such as accented letters cannot be
shown correctly on the display.
iPod operations
Controllable iPod
Software version
– Depends on the condition of communication
between the iPod and the unit.
• If the text information includes more than 8
characters, it scrolls on the display. This unit can
display up to 40 characters.
iPod with dock connector
(3rd Generation)
2.3 or later
iPod with Click Wheel
(4th Generation)
3.1 or later
iPod mini
iPod photo
iPod nano
1.4 or later
1.2 or later
1.0 or later
1.0 or later
General settings—PSM
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from
“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the volume level
is set higher than “VOL 30,” the unit automatically
changes the volume level to “VOL 30.”
iPod with Video
(5th Generation)
• If your iPod software version is older than those
mentioned above, you may not be able to control the
iPod properly. Update your iPod to the latest software
version before using it with this unit.
– You can check the software version of your iPod
from “About” in the “Setting” menu of the iPod.
– For details about updating your iPod, visit
<http://www.apple.com>.
19
Hierarchical structure of file searching when an iPod is connected
20
Troubleshooting
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers.
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
• The unit does not work at all.
Reset the unit (see page 3).
Store stations manually.
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.
• Static noise while listening to the radio.
• Disc cannot be played back.
Connect the antenna firmly.
Insert the disc correctly.
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be skipped. • Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which
you used for recording.
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 9).
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 3).
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
• Change the disc.
• Check the cords and connections.
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.
• Disc cannot be played back.
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in the
format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2,
Romeo, or Joliet.
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the
file names.
• Noise is generated.
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or
WMA tracks.)
• A longer readout time is required (“CHECK”
keeps flashing on the display).
Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.
Continued on the next page
21
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Tracks do not play back in the order you have Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.
intended them to play.
•
Elapsed
playing
time
is
not
correct.This
the tracks are recorded on the disc.
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT“ appear alternately on Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.
the display.
• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.
album name).
This unit can only display letters (upper case), numbers,
and a limited number of symbols.
•
The iPod does not turn on or does not work.•
• Update the firmware version.
Check the connectin
•
Charge the battery.
•
•
The
sound
is
e and its connecthtieon.
disto
display.•
“NO
IPOD”
Ch
a
e
p
c
p
k
e
t
a
h
r
e
s
connecting cab
oln
• Charge the battery
•
Playback
stops.The
off the unit’s power and turn it on again.
h
• No sound can be heard when connecting an • Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.
iPod nano.
• Update the firmware version of the iPod nano.
• “NO FILES” appears on the display.
No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod.
•
“RESET 1”
–
“RESET 7” appears on the display.Reconnect the iPod.
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.
Check the connecting cable and its connection
Reset the iPod.
• The iPod’s controls do not work after
disconnecting from this unit.
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
• iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
22
Specifications
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION
CD PLAYER SECTION
Power Output:
Type:
Compact disc player
20 W RMS × 4 Channels at 4 Ω
Signal Detection
System:
Non-contact optical pickup
(semiconductor laser)
and ≤ 1% THD+N
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
80 dBA (reference: 1 W into 4 Ω)
Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)
Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
Load Impedance:
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)
Dynamic Range:
96 dB
Tone Control Range:
Bass/Mid-range/Treble: 12 dB at 60 Hz/1 kHz/
7.5 kHz
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB
Wow and Flutter:
Less than measurable limit
Frequency Response:
Line-Out Level/Impedance:
KD-APD38: 4.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
KD-PDR30: 2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)
Max. Bit Rate:
320 kbps
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:
Max. Bit Rate:
192 kbps
KD-APD38: 4.0 V /20 kΩ load (full scale)
KD-PDR30: 2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
GENERAL
Power Requirement:
Output Impedance:
Other Terminal:
1 kΩ
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V
(11 V to 16 V allowance)
Negative ground
Allowable Operating 0°C to +40°C
Temperature: (32°F to 104°F)
AUX (auxiliary) input jack, iPod jack, Steering wheel
remote input (only for KD-APD38)
Grounding System:
TUNER SECTION
Frequency Range:
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.)
FM: 87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz
Installation Size: 182 mm × 52 mm × 150 mm
(7-3/16” × 2-1/16” × 5-15/16”)
(with channel interval set to 100 kHz or 200 kHz)
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
(with channel interval set to 50 kHz)
AM: 530 kHz to 1 710 kHz
Panel Size:
187 mm × 58 mm × 13 mm
(7-3/8” × 2-5/16” × 9/16”)
Mass:
1.3 kg (2.9 lbs)
(with channel interval set to 10 kHz)
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz
(excluding accessories)
(with channel interval set to 9 kHz)
Design and specifications are subject to change without
notice.
FM Tuner
Usable Sensitivity:
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity: 16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
Alternate Channel
Selectivity (400 kHz):
Frequency Response:
Stereo Separation:
AM Tuner
65 dB
If a kit is necessary for your car, consult your
telephone directory for the nearest car audio
speciality shop.
40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
35 dB
Sensitivity/Selectivity:
20 μV/35 dB
23
Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit
Still having trouble??
USA ONLY
Call 1-800-252-5722
http://www.jvc.com
We can help you!
EN, SP, FR
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
1206DTSMDTJEIN
KD-APD38/KD-PDR30
Installation/Connection Manual
Manual de instalación/conexión
Manuel d’installation/raccordement
1206DTSMDTJEIN
EN, SP, FR
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
GET0467-002A
[J]
ENGLISH
ESPAÑOL
FRANÇAIS
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground
electrical systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a
voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio este sistema, será necesario un inversor de tensión, que puede ser
dealers.
Esta unidad está diseñada para funcionar con 12 V de CC, con
sistemas eléctricos de masa NEGATIVA. Si su vehículo no posee
Cet appareil est conçu pour fonctionner sur des sources de courant
continu de 12 V à masse NEGATIVE. Si votre véhicule n’offre pas ce
type d’alimentation, il vous faut un convertisseur de tension, que vous
pouvez acheter chez un revendeur d’autoradios JVC.
adquirido en los concesionarios de JVC de equipos de audio para
automóviles.
WARNINGS
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the
battery’s negative terminal and make all electrical connections before
installing the unit.
ADVERTENCIAS
AVERTISSEMENTS
Para evitar cortocircuitos, recomendamos que desconecte el terminal Pour éviter tout court-circuit, nous vous recommandons de débrancher
negativo de la batería y que efectúe todas las conexiones eléctricas
antes de instalar la unidad.
la borne négative de la batterie et d’effectuer tous les raccordements
électriques avant d’installer l’appareil.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after
installation.
• Asegúrese de volver a conectar a masa esta unidad al chasis
del automóvil después de la instalación.
• Assurez-vous de raccorder de nouveau la mise à la masse de
cet appareil au châssis de la voiture après l’installation.
Notes:
Notas:
Remarques:
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows
frequently, consult your JVC car audio dealer.
• Reemplace el fusible por uno con la corriente especificada. Si el
fusible se quemase frecuentemente consulte con su concesionario
de JVC de equipos de audio para automóviles.
• Se recomienda conectar los altavoces con una potencia máxima
de más de 50 W (tanto atrás como adelante, con una impedancia
de 4 Ω a 8 Ω). Si la potencia máxima es de menos de 50 W, cambie
“AMP GAIN” para evitar daños en los altavoces (consulte la página 15
del MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES).
• Para evitar cortocircuitos, cubra los cables NO UTILIZADOS con cinta
aislante.
• El sumidero térmico estará muy caliente después del uso. Asegúrese
de no tocarlo al desmontar esta unidad.
• Remplacer le fusible par un de la valeur précisée. Si le fusible saute
souvent, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC.
• Il est recommandé de connecter des enceintes avec une puissance de
plus de 50 W (les enceintes arrière et les enceintes avant, avec une
impédance comprise entre 4 Ω et 8 Ω). Si la puissance maximum est
inférieure à 50 W, changez “AMP GAIN” pour éviter d’endommager
vos enceintes (voir page 15 du MANUAL D’INSTRUCTIONS).
• Pour éviter les court-circuits, couvrir les bornes des fils qui ne sont
PAS UTILISÉS avec de la bande isolante.
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum
power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an
impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W,
change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being
damaged (see page 15 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads
with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it
when removing this unit.
• Le dissipateur de chaleur devient très chaud après usage. Faire
attention de ne pas le toucher en retirant cet appareil.
Heat sink
Sumidero térmico
Dissipateur de chaleur
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker
connections:
PRECAUCIONES sobre las conexiones de la
fuente de alimentación y de los altavoces:
PRECAUTIONS sur l’alimentation et la
connexion des enceintes:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the • NO conecte los conductores de altavoz del cable de
• NE CONNECTEZ PAS les fils d’enceintes du cordon
d’alimentation à la batterie; sinon, l’appareil serait
sérieusement endommagé.
• AVANT de connecter les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation
aux enceintes, vérifiez le câblage des enceintes de votre voiture.
car battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously damaged.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the
speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.
alimentación a la batería de automóvil, pues podrían
producirse graves daños en la unidad.
• ANTES de conectar a los altavoces los conductores de altavoz del
cable de alimentación, verifique el conexionado de altavoz de su
automóvil.
Parts list for installation and connection
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, Con esta unidad se suministran las siguientes piezas. Si hay algún
consult your JVC car audio dealer immediately.
Lista de piezas para instalación y conexión
Liste des pièces pour l’installation et
raccordement
Les pièces suivantes sont fournies avec cet appareil. Si quelque chose
elemento faltante, consulte inmediatamente con su concesionario de
JVC de equipos de audio para automóviles.
manquait, consultez votre revendeur autoradio JVC immédiatement.
A / B
E
C
D
Hard case/Control panel
Estuche duro/Panel de control
Etui de transport/Panneau de commande
Power cord
Cordón de alimentación
Cordon d’alimentation
Sleeve
Cubierta
Manchon
Trim plate
Placa de guarnición
Plaque d’assemblage
F
H
I
G
Connection cable for iPod
Cable de conexión para iPod
Câble de connexion pour iPod
Washer (ø5)
Arandela (ø5)
Rondelle (ø5)
Lock nut (M5)
Tuerca de seguridad (M5)
Ecrou d’arrêt (M5)
Cable tie
Sujetacables
Collier pour câble
J
K
L
M
N
Mounting bolt—M5 × 20 mm (M5 × 13/16")
Perno de montaje—M5 × 20 mm
(M5 × 13/16 pulgada)
Boulon de montage—M5 × 20 mm
(M5 × 13/16 pouces)
Rubber cushion
Cojín de goma
Amortisseur en
caoutchouc
Handles
Manijas
Poignées
Remote controller
Control remoto
Télécommande
Battery
Pila
Pile
1
INSTALLATION
INSTALACION (MONTAJE EN EL
TABLERO DE INSTRUMENTOS)
INSTALLATION (MONTAGE
DANS LE TABLEAU DE BORD)
(IN-DASH MOUNTING)
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any La siguiente ilustración muestra una instalación típica. Si tiene alguna
questions or require information regarding installation kits, consult
your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.
L’illustration suivante est un exemple d’installation typique. Si
vous avez des questions ou avez besoin d’information sur des kits
pregunta o necesita información acerca de las herramientas para
instalación, consulte con su concesionario de JVC de equipos de audio d’installation, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC ou une
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed para automóviles o a una compañía que suministra tales herramientas. compagnie d’approvisionnement.
by a qualified technician.
• Si usted no está seguro de cómo instalar correctamente la unidad,
hágala instalar por un técnico cualificado.
• Si l’on n’est pas sûr de pouvoir installer correctement cet appareil, le
faire installer par un technicien qualifié.
Do the required electrical connections.
Realice las conexiones eléctricas requeridas.
Réalisez les connexions électriques.
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the
sleeve firmly in place.
Doble las lengüetas apropiadas para
retener firmemente la manga en su lugar.
Tordez les languettes appropriées pour
maintenir le manchon en place.
Removing the unit
Extracción de la unidad
Retrait de l’appareil
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.
Antes de extraer la unidad, libere la sección trasera.
Avant de retirer l’appareil, libérer la section arrière.
Insert the two handles, then pull them as
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.
Inserte las dos manijas y, a continuación,
extráigalas de la manera indicada en la ilustración
para poder desmontar la unidad.
Insérez les deux poignées, puis tirez de la façon
illustrée de façon à retirer l’appareil.
When using the optional stay / Cuando emplea un
soporte opcional / Lors de l’utilisation du hauban en
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Instalación de la unidad sin utilizar
la cubierta / Lors de l’installation de l’appareil scans utiliser de manchon
option
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
En un automóvil Toyota, por ejemplo, en primer lugar desmonte el autorradio e instale la unidad en su lugar.
Dans une voiture Toyota, par exemple, retirez d’abord l’autoradio et installez l’appareil à sa place.
Stay (option)
Soporte (opción)
Hauban (en option)
Fire wall
Tabique a prueba de incendios
Cloison
Flat type screws—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8")*2
Tornillos tipo plano—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8 pulgada)*2
Vis à tête plate—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8 pouces)*2
Dashboard
Tablero de instrumentos
Tableau de bord
Bracket*2
Ménsula*2
Support*2
Screw (option)
Tornillo (opción)
Vis (en option)
Flat type screws—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8")*2
Tornillos tipo plano—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8 pulgada)*2
Vis à tête plate—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8 pouces)*2
Pocket
Compartimiento
Poche
Bracket*2
Ménsula*2
Support*2
Note
Nota
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm (3/8") -long screws. If longer
screws are used, they could damage the unit.
: Cuando instala la unidad en la ménsula de montaje, asegúrese de utilizar los tornillos de 8 mm (3/8 pulgada) de
longitud. Si se utilizan tornillos más largos, éstos pueden dañar la unidad.
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.
Instale la unidad a un ángulo de menos de 30˚.
Installez l’appareil avec un angle de moins de 30˚.
Remarque : Lors de l’installation de l’appareil sur le support de montage, s’assurer d’utiliser des vis d’une longueur de 8 mm
(3/8 pouces). Si des vis plus longues sont utilisées, elles peuvent endommager l’appareil.
1
2
1
2
1
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the
rear.
Not supplied for this unit.
*
Al poner la unidad vertical, tenga cuidado de no dañar el fusible
provisto en la parte posterior.
No suministrado con esta unidad.
*
Lorsque vous mettez l’appareil à la verticale, faire attention de ne pas
endommager le fusible situé sur l’arrière.
Non fourni avec cet appareil.
2
*
*
*
2
ENGLISH
ESPAÑOL
FRANÇAIS
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
CONEXIONES ELECTRICAS
RACCORDEMENTS ELECTRIQUES
A
Typical connections / Conexiones tipicas / Raccordements typiques
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully.
Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car unidad.
Antes de la conexión: Verifique atentamente el conexionado del
vehículo. Una conexión incorrecta podría producir daños graves en la
Avant de commencer la connexion: Vérifiez attentivement le
câblage du véhicule. Une connexion incorrecte peut endommager
sérieusement l’appareil.
body may be different in color.
Los cordones del cable de alimentación y los del conector procedentes Le fil du cordon d’alimentation et ceux des connecteurs du châssis de
de la carrocería del automóvil podrían ser de diferentes en color.
la voiture peuvent être différents en couleur.
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order
specified in the illustration below.
1 Conecte los conductores de color del cable de alimentación en el
1 Connectez les fils colorés du cordon d’alimentation dans l’ordre
orden especificado en la ilustración de abajo.
spécifié sur l’illustration ci-dessous.
2 Connect the antenna cord.
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.
2 Conecte el cable de antena.
3 Por último, conecte el cable de alimentación a la unidad.
2 Connectez le cordon d’antenne.
3 Finalement, connectez le faisceau de fils à l’appareil.
To steering wheel remote controller (see diagram )—only for KD-APD38
Al control remoto del volante de dirección (véase diagrama )—sólo para KD-APD38
Pour la télécommande de volant (voir le diagramme )—seulement pour le KD-APD38
Loop (see diagram
Lazo (véase diagrama
)
)
Rear ground terminal
Terminal de tierra
posterior
Boucle (voir le diagramme
)
Borne arrière de masse
15 A fuse
Fusible de 15 A
Fusible 15 A
Antenna terminal
Terminal de la antena
Borne de l’antenne
iPod jack
(see diagram
Jack del iPod
)
Ignition switch
(véase diagrama
)
Interruptor de encendido
Interrupteur d’allumage
Prise iPod
(voir le diagramme
Black
Negro
)
To metallic body or chassis of the car
A un cuerpo metálico o chasis del automóvil
Vers corps métallique ou châssis de la voiture
Noir
Line out (see diagram
Salida de línea (véase diagrama
Sortie de ligne (voir le diagramme
)
)
)
Yellow*2
Amarillo*2
Jaune*2
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
A un terminal activo del bloque de fusibles conectado a la batería del
automóvil (desviando el interruptor de encendido) (12 V constantes)
A une borne sous tension du porte-fusible connectée à la batterie de la
voiture (en dérivant l’interrupteur d’allumage) (12 V constant)
Red
Rojo
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
A un terminal accesorio del bloque de fusibles
Vers borne accessoire du porte-fusible
Fuse block
Bloque de fusibles
Porte-fusible
Rouge
Blue with white stripe
Azul con rayas blancas
Bleu avec bande blanche
To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any (200 mA max.)
Al conductor remoto de otro equipo o de la antena automática, si hubiere (máx. 200 mA)
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne automatique s’il y en a une
(200 mA max.)
White with black stripe
Blanco con rayas negras
Blanc avec bande noire
White
Blanco
Blanc
Gray with black stripe
Gris con rayas negras
Gris avec bande noire
Gray
Gris
Gris
Green with black stripe
Verde con rayas negras
Vert avec bande noire
Green
Verde
Vert
Purple with black stripe
Púrpura con rayas negras
Violet avec bande noire
Purple
Púrpura
Violet
Left speaker (front)
Altavoz izquierdo (frontal)
Right speaker (front)
Altavoz derecho (frontal)
Left speaker (rear)
Altavoz izquierdo (trasero)
Right speaker (rear)
Altavoz derecho (trasero)
Enceinte gauche (avant)
Enceinte droit (avant)
Enceinte gauche (arrière)
Enceinte droit (arrière)
B
Connecting to the steering wheel remote controller (only for KD-APD38) / Conexión al control remoto del volante de dirección (sólo para
KD-APD38) / Connexion de la télécommande de volant (seulement pour le KD-APD38)
If your car is equipped with the steering wheel remote controller,
you can operate this unit using the controller. For connection, an
exclusive remote adapter (not supplied) which matches your car is
required. For details, consult the same car audio dealer as where the
unit is purchased.
Si votre voiture est équipée d’une télécommande de volant, vous
pouvez commander cet autoradio en utilisant cette télécommande.
Pour la connexion, vous avez besoin d’un adaptateur de
télécommande spécialisé (non fourni) correspondant à votre voiture.
Pour en savoir plus, consultez le revendeur autoradio où vous avez
acheté votre autoradio.
Si su automóvil está equipado con control remoto en el volante de
dirección, podrá controlar este receptor utilizando el control remoto.
Para la conexión, se requiere un adaptador remoto exclusivo (no
suministrado) que sea adecuado para su automóvil. Para los detalles,
consulte con el concesionario car audio donde compró el receptor.
Remote adapter*1
Steering wheel remote input
Entrada del control remoto del volante de dirección
Entrée de la télécommande de volant
Adaptador para remoto exclusivo*1
Adaptateur pour télécommande spécialisé*1
Steering wheel remote controller (equipped in the car)
Control remoto del volante de dirección (equipado en el vehículo)
Télécommande de volant (installée dans la voiture)
1
2
1
1
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this
lead must be connected, otherwise power cannot be turned on.
*
*
No suministrado con esta unidad.
*
*
Non fourni avec cet appareil.
Pour vérifier le fonctionnement de cet appareil avant installation, ce fil
doit être raccordé, sinon l’appareil ne peut pas être mis sous tension.
2
2
Antes de comprobar el funcionamiento de esta unidad previa a de
la instalación, es necesario conectar este cable, de lo contrario no se
podrá conectar la alimentación.
3
Connecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer Conexión de los amplificadores y/o subwoofer externos Connexion
d’amplificateurs extérieurs et/ou d’un caisson de grave
C
/
/
Vous pouvez connecter des amplificateurs pour améliorer votre
système autoradio.
• Connectez le fil de commande à distance (bleu avec bande blanche)
au fil de commande à distance de l’autre appareil de façon qu’il
puisse être commandé via cet appareil.
You can connect amplifiers to upgrade your car stereo system.
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote
lead of the other equipment so that it can be controlled through
this unit.
Usted podrá conectar amplificadores para mejorar el sistema estéreo
de su automóvil.
•
Conecte el conductor remoto (azul con rayas blancas) al conductor
remoto del otro equipo para poderlo controlar a través de esta unidad.
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the • Desconecte los altavoces de esta unidad y conéctelos al
• Déconnectez les enceintes de cet appareil et connectez-les
à l’amplificateur. Laissez les fils d’enceintes de cet appareil
inutilisés.
• Pour le KD-APD38: Le niveau de sortie de ligne de cet appareil est
maintenu à un niveau élevé pour maintenir une qualité Hi-Fi pour
les sons reproduits par cet appareil.
Lors de la connexion d’un amplificateur extérieur à cet appareil,
diminuez le réglage du gain sur l’amplificateur extérieur pour
obtenir les meilleures performances de cet appareil.
amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of this unit unused.
• For KD-APD38: The line output level of this unit is kept high to
maintain the hi-fi sounds reproduced from this unit.
When connecting an external amplifier to this unit, turn down
the gain control on the external amplifier to obtain the best
performance from this unit.
amplificador. Los cables de los altavoces de esta unidad
quedan sin usar.
• Para KD-APD38: El nivel de salida de línea de esta unidad permanece
alto para que corresponda con los sonidos de alta fidelidad
reproducidos por esta unidad.
Cuando conecte un amplificador externo a esta unidad, disminuya
el control de ganancia del amplificador externo para obtener un
óptimo rendimiento de esta unidad.
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
Conector en Y (no suministrado con esta unidad)
Connecteur Y (non fourni avec cet appareil)
Front speakers
Altavoces delanteros
Enceintes avant
JVC Amplifier
Amplificador de JVC
JVC Amplificateur
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)
Cable remoto (azul con rayas blancas)
Fil d’alimentation à distance (bleu
avec bande blanche)
Set “L/O MODE” to “WOOFER” (See page
15 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)
Ajuste “L/O MODE” a “WOOFER”
(Consulte la página 15 del MANUAL DE
INSTRUCCIONES.)
Réglez “L/O MODE” sur “WOOFER” (Voir
page 15 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS.)
Set “L/O MODE” to “REAR” (See page 15
of the INSTRUCTIONS.)
Ajuste “L/O MODE” a “REAR” (Consulte
la página 15 del MANUAL DE
INSTRUCCIONES.)
Réglez “L/O MODE” sur “REAR” (Voir
page 15 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS.)
To the remote lead of other equipment or
automatic antenna if any
Al conductor remoto de otro equipo o de
la antena automática, si hubiere
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil
ou à l’antenne automatique s’il y en a une
or
o
ou
Subwoofer
Subwoofer
Caisson de grave
Rear speakers
Altavoces posteriores
Enceintes arrière
JVC Amplifier
Amplificador de JVC
JVC Amplificateur
JVC Amplifier
Amplificador de JVC
JVC Amplificateur
Front speakers
Altavoces delanteros
Enceintes avant
Connecting an Apple iPod / Conexión del Apple iPod / Connexion d’un iPod Apple
D
You can connect an iPod to this unit using the supplied connection cable for iPod.
1 Insert the supplied cable tie across the loop.
2 Press in the head of the connection cable for iPod until you hear a clicking sound.
3 Fasten the connection cable using the cable tie to firmly hold the connection cable in place.
Puede conectar el iPod a esta unidad mediante el cable de conexión de iPod suministrado.
1 Inserte el sujetacables suministrado a través del lazo.
Apple iPod (separately purchased)
Apple iPod (adquirido separadamente)
iPod Apple (vendu séparément)
Cable tie
Sujetacables
Collier pour câble
2 Presione la cabeza del cable de conexión para iPod hasta escuchar un chasquido.
3 Sujete el cable de conexión utilizando el sujetacables de manera que quede firmemente
retenido en su lugar.
Vous pouvez connecter un iPod à cet appareil en utilisant le câble de connexion du iPod fourni.
1 Insérez le collier pour câble fourni dans la boucle.
2 Faite pression sur la tête du câble de connexion pour iPod jusqu’à ce que vous entendiez un déclic.
3 Fixez le câble de connexion en utilisant le collier pour câble pour le maintenir solidement le câble
de connexion en place.
Connection cable for iPod (supplied)
Cable de conexión para iPod (suministrado)
Câble de connexion pour iPod (fourni)
iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
iPod es una marca comercial de Apple Computer, Inc., registrada en los EE.UU. y otros países.
iPod est une marque de commerce d’Apple Computer, Inc., enregistrée aux États-Unis et dans les autres pays.
Loop
Lazo
Boucle
3
3
3
*
Attachez solidement le fil de mise à la masse au châssis métallique de
la voiture—à un endroit qui n’est pas recouvert de peinture (s’il est
recouvert de peinture, enlevez d’abord la peinture avant d’attacher le fil).
L’appareil peut être endommagé si cela n’est pas fait correctement.
Fil d’alimentation à distance
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of
the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove
the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage
to the unit.
Remote lead
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit).
*
Fije firmemente el cable de tierra a la carrocería metálica o al chasis—a
un lugar no cubierto con pintura (si está cubierto con pintura, quítela
antes de fijar el cable). De lo contrario, se podrían producir daños en la
unidad.
Cable remoto
Cable de señal (no suministrado con esta unidad).
4
5
4
5
4
5
*
*
*
*
*
*
Cordon de signal (non fourni avec cet appareil).
TROUBLESHOOTING
• The fuse blows.
LOCALIZACION DE AVERIAS
• El fusible se quema.
EN CAS DE DIFFICULTES
• Le fusible saute.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?
* ¿Están los conductores rojo y negro correctamente conectados?
* Les fils rouge et noir sont-ils racordés correctement?
• Power cannot be turned on.
• No es posible conectar la alimentación.
• L’appareil ne peut pas être mise sous tension.
* Is the yellow lead connected?
* ¿Está el cable amarillo conectado?
* Le fil jaune est-elle raccordée?
• No sound from the speakers.
• No sale sonido de los altavoces.
• Pas de son des enceintes.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
* ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz cortocircuitado?
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il court-circuité?
• Sound is distorted.
• El sonido presenta distorsión.
• Le son est déformé.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
* ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz conectado a masa?
* ¿Están los terminales “–” de los altavoces L y R conectados a una
masa común?
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble
à la masse?
• Noise interfere with sounds.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using
shorter and thicker cords?
• Perturbación de ruido.
* ¿El terminal de tierra trasero está conectado al chasis del automóvil
utilizando los cordones más corto y más grueso?
• Interférence avec les sons.
* La prise arrière de mise à la terre est-elle connectée au châssis de la
voiture avec un cordon court et épais?
• This unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• Esta unidad se calienta.
• Cet appareil devient chaud.
* ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz conectado a masa?
* ¿Están los terminales “–” de los altavoces L y R conectados a una
masa común?
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble
à la masse?
• This unit does not work at all.
* Have you reset your unit?
• Esta unidad no funciona en absoluto.
• Cet appareil ne fonctionne pas du tout.
* ¿Reinicializó la unidad?
* Avez-vous réinitialisé votre appareil?
4
CD RECEIVER
RÉCEPTEUR CD
KD-PDR31
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.
Pour annuler la démonstration des affichages, référez-vous à la page 6.
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.
Pour l’installation et les raccordements, se référer au manuel séparé.
INSTRUCTIONS
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS
GET0469-003A
[EX/EU]
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best
possible performance from the unit.
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical
instruments.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.
How to reset your unit
Warning:
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be
sure to look ahead carefully or you may be involved
in a traffic accident.
This symbol is only valid in
the European Union.
•
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.
How to forcibly eject a disc
Information for Users on Disposal of Old
Equipment
This symbol indicates that the product with
this symbol should not be disposed as general
household waste at its end-of-life. If you wish to
dispose of this product, please do so in accordance
with applicable national legislation or other rules in
your country and municipality. By disposing of this
product correctly, you will help to conserve natural
resources and will help prevent potential negative
effects on the environment and human health.
•
•
Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.
If this does not work, reset your unit.
2
How to use the M MODE button
CONTENTS
If you press M MODE, the unit goes into functions mode,
then the number buttons and 5/∞ buttons work as
different function buttons.
Control panel ..................................
Remote controller — RM-RK50 .............
4
5
Ex.: When number button 2 works as
MO (monaural) button.
Getting started................................
Basic operations...................................................
6
6
Radio operations .............................
7
FM RDS operations...........................
Searching for your favorite FM RDS programme....
8
8
To use these buttons for their original functions
again after pressing M MODE, wait for 5 seconds
without pressing any of these buttons until the
functions mode is cleared or press M MODE again.
Disc operations................................ 10
Playing a disc in the unit ..................................... 10
iPod operations ............................... 12
Sound adjustments.......................... 14
General settings — PSM .................. 15
External component operations ....... 18
More about this unit ........................ 18
Maintenance ................................... 22
Troubleshooting.............................. 23
Specifications.................................. 25
Detaching the control panel
Attaching the control panel
Caution on volume setting:
Note: Only for [EX] model users in UK and
European countries
For security reasons, a numbered ID card is provided
with this unit, and the same ID number is imprinted on
the unit’s chassis. Keep the card in a safe place, as it will
help the authorities to identify your unit if stolen.
For safety...
Discs produce very little noise compared with other
sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc
to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden
increase of the output level.
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any complicated
operations.
Temperature inside the car...
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes
normal before operating the unit.
3
Control panel
Parts identification
Display window
1
Control dial
;
a
s
d
RND (random) button
M MODE button
(control panel release) button
Disc information indicators—
TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)
DISC indicator
Playback mode / item indicators—RND (random),
(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)
RDS indicators—AF, REG, TP, PTY
Tuner reception indicators—MO (monaural),
ST (stereo)
S.BASS (super bass) indicator
EQ (equalizer) indicator
Tr (track) indicator
Source display / Time countdown indicator
Main display
Sound mode (iEQ: intelligent equalizer)
indicators—JAZZ, ROCK, HIP HOP, CLASSIC, POPS,
USER
2 0 (eject) button
3
4
5
Loading slot
T/P (traffic programme/programme type) button
DISP (display) button
6 4 /¢ buttons
f
g
7
8
9
Display window
(standby/on attenuator) button
AUX (auxiliary) input jack
h
j
p 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons
q
w
e
r
SEL (select) button
BAND button
SRC (source) button
Remote sensor
DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).
EQ (equalizer) button
MO (monaural) button
SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button
Number buttons
k
l
/
z
x
c
t
y
u
i
o
RPT (repeat) button
4
Main elements and features
Remote controller —
RM-RK50
Installing the lithium coin battery
(CR2025)
1
(standby/on/attenuator) button
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or
attenuates the sound when the power is on.
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.
Aim the remote controller directly at the remote
sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle
in between.
2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons
• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.
• Changes the preset stations with D ∞.
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA discs.
• While listening to an Apple iPod:
– Pauses or resumes playback with D ∞.
– Enters the main menu with 5 U.
(Now 5 U/D ∞/2 R/F 3 work as the menu
selecting buttons.)*
Warning:
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or
its equivalent; otherwise, it may explode.
• Do not leave the remote controller in a place
(such as dashboards) exposed to direct sunlight
for a long time; otherwise, it may explode.
• Store the battery in a place where children
cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.
• To prevent the battery from over-heating,
cracking, or starting a fire:
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the
battery, or dispose of it in a fire.
– Do not leave the battery with other metallic
materials.
3
4
5
VOL – / VOL + buttons
• Adjusts the volume level.
SOUND button
•
Selects the sound mode (iEQ: intelligent equalizer).
SOURCE button
• Selects the source.
6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and
held.
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar
tools.
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when
throwing away or saving it.
• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.
• While listening to an iPod (in menu selecting
mode):
– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then, press
D ∞ to confirm the selection.)
– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and held.
This unit is equipped with the steering wheel
remote control function.
• See the Installation/Connection Manual (separate
volume) for connection.
* 5 U : Returns to the previous menu.
D ∞ : Confirms the selection.
5
Basic settings
Getting started
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages
15 – 17.
Basic operations
~ Turn on the power.
1
2
Ÿ
1
2
Canceling the display demonstrations
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”
Setting the clock
Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust the hour.
Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then adjust the
minute.
Select “24H/12H,” then “24H” (hour) or “12H”
(hour).
1
*
You cannot select “CD” as the playback source
if there is no disc in the unit.
“NO IPOD” appears if iPod is not connected.
2
*
! For FM/AM tuner
3
Finish the procedure.
⁄ Adjust the volume.
To check the current clock time while the
power is turned off
Clock time is shown on the
display for about 5 seconds. See
also page 16.
VOL 20
Volume level appears.
@ Adjust the sound as you want. (See
pages 14 and 15.)
To drop the volume in
a moment (ATT)
To restore the sound, press
the button again.
To turn off the power
6
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to
receive
Radio operations
~
Lights up when monaural mode is activated.
Ÿ
Lights up when receiving an FM stereo
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.
MONO
Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.
88.3
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same
procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO indicator
goes off.
! Start searching for a station.
Storing stations in memory
When a station is received, searching stops.
To stop searching, press the same button
again.
You can preset six stations for each band.
FM station automatic presetting—
SSM (Strong-station Sequential
Memory)
To tune in to a station manually
In step ! above...
1
1
Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to
store into.
2
3
92.5
M
2
Select a desired station frequency.
SSM
“SSM” flashes, then disappears when automatic
presetting is over.
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are
searched and stored automatically in the FM band.
7
Manual presetting
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset
number 4 of the FM1 band.
FM RDS operations
What you can do with RDS
RDS (Radio Data System) allows FM stations to send an
additional signal along with their regular programme
signals.
1
By receiving the RDS data, this unit can do the
following:
• Programme Type (PTY) Search (see the following)
• TA (Traffic Announcement) and PTY Standby
Receptions (see pages 9 and 16)
• Tracing the same programme automatically
—Network-Tracking Reception (see page 10)
• Programme Search (see pages 10 and 16)
2
FM I 92.5
3
P4
92.5
Preset number flashes for a while.
Searching for your favorite
FM RDS programme
You can tune in to a station broadcasting your favorite
programme by searching for a PTY code.
Listening to a preset station
1
2
• To store your favorite programme types, see page 9.
Select the preset station (1 – 6) you want.
~
The last selected PTY code
appears.
Ÿ Select one of your favorite programme
or
types.
or
Select one of the PTY codes (see page
10).
To check the current clock time while
listening to an FM (non-RDS) or AM station
• For FM RDS stations, see page 10.
Frequency Ô Clock
8
! Start searching for your favorite
Using the standby receptions
TA Standby Reception
programme.
TA Standby Reception allows the unit to switch
temporarily to Traffic Announcement (TA) from any
source other than AM.
If there is a station broadcasting a programme
of the same PTY code as you have selected, that
station is tuned in.
The volume changes to the preset TA volume level if the
current level is lower than the preset level (see page
16).
To activate TA Standby Reception
The TP (Traffic Programme) indicator
either lights up or flashes.
Storing your favorite programme
types
• If the TP indicator lights up, TA Standby Reception is
activated.
You can store six favorite programme types.
• If the TP indicator flashes, TA Standby Reception is
not yet activated. (This occurs when you are listening
to an FM station without the RDS signals required for
TA Standby Reception.)
Preset programme types in the number buttons
(1 to 6):
To activate TA Standby Reception, tune in to another
station providing these signals. The TP indicator will
stop flashing and remain lit.
1
2
Select a PTY code (see steps ~ to ! on
pages 8 and 9).
To deactivate the TA Standby Reception
Select the preset number (1 – 6) you want to
store into.
The TP indicator goes off.
PTY Standby Reception
PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to switch
temporarily to your favorite PTY programme from any
source other than AM.
To activate and select your favorite PTY code for
PTY Standby Reception, see page 16.
The PTY indicator either lights up or flashes.
• If the PTY indicator lights up, PTY Standby Reception
is activated.
Ex.: When “ROCK M” is selected
3
4
Repeat steps 1 and 2 to store other PTY codes
into other preset numbers.
• If the PTY indicator flashes, PTY Standby Reception is
not yet activated.
Finish the procedure.
To activate PTY Standby Reception, tune in to another
station providing these signals. The PTY indicator will
stop flashing and remain lit.
Continued on the next page
9
To deactivate the PTY Standby Reception, select
“OFF” for the PTY code (see page 16). The PTY indicator
goes off.
To check the current clock time while
listening to an FM RDS station
Station name (PS) = Station
Frequency = Programme
type (PTY) = Clock = (back to
the beginning)
Tracing the same programme—
Network-Tracking Reception
When driving in an area where FM reception is not
sufficient enough, this unit automatically tunes in to
another FM RDS station of the same network, possibly
broadcasting the same programme with stronger
signals (see the illustration below).
PTY codes
NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, SPORT, EDUCATE, DRAMA,
CULTURE, SCIENCE, VARIED, POP M (music), ROCK
M (music), EASY M (music), LIGHT M (music),
CLASSICS, OTHER M (music), WEATHER, FINANCE,
CHILDREN, SOCIAL, RELIGION, PHONE IN, TRAVEL,
LEISURE, JAZZ, COUNTRY, NATION M (music),
OLDIES, FOLK M (music), DOCUMENT
When shipped from the factory, Network-Tracking
Reception is activated.
To change the Network-Tracking Reception
setting, see “AF-REG” on page 16.
Programme A broadcasting on different frequency areas
(01 – 05)
Disc operations
Playing a disc in the unit
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the
source or eject the disc.
Automatic station selection—
Programme Search
Usually when you press the number buttons, the preset
station is tuned in.
To stop play and eject the disc
If the signals from the FM RDS preset station are not
sufficient for good reception, this unit, using the AF
data, tunes in to another frequency broadcasting the
same programme as the original preset station is
broadcasting.
• Press SRC to listen to another
playback source.
• The unit takes some time to tune in to another
station using programme search.
• See also page 16.
10
To fast-forward or reverse the track
To go to the next or previous tracks
Other main functions
Skipping tracks quickly during play
• For MP3 or WMA discs, you can skip tracks within the
same folder.
Ex.: To select track 32 while playing tracks whose
number is a single digit (1 to 9)
1
2
To go to the next or previous folders (only for
MP3 or WMA discs)
Each time you press the button, you can skip 10
tracks.
• After the last track, the first track will be selected
and vice versa.
To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder
(for MP3 or WMA discs) directly
To select a number from 01 – 06:
3
To select a number from 07 – 12:
Prohibiting disc ejection
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.
• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA discs, it
is required that folders are assigned with 2-digit
numbers at the beginning of their folder names—
01, 02, 03, and so on.
NO EJECT
To select a particular track in a folder
(for MP3 or WMA disc):
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same
procedure.
11
Changing the display information
Selecting the playback modes
You can use only one of the following playback modes
at a time.
While playing an audio CD or a
CD Text
1
2
Select your desired playback mode.
Repeat play
Mode Plays repeatedly
7
While playing an MP3 or a WMA track
• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG ON”
(see page 17)
TRK RPT : The current track.
FLDR RPT * : All tracks of the current folder.
RPT OFF : Cancels.
7
Random play
• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG OFF”
Mode Plays at random
FLDR RND *: All tracks of the current folder, then
tracks of the next folder and so on.
DISC RND : All tracks of the current disc.
: Elapsed playing time with the current
track number
: Clock with the current track number
: Corresponding indicator lights up on the
display
RND OFF : Cancels.
* Only while playing an MP3 or a WMA disc.
: Corresponding indicator lights up on
the display
1
2
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information,
folder name and file name appear. In this case, the
TAG indicator will not light up.
iPod operations
You can play songs from an Apple iPod through this unit
by connecting it with the supplied connection cable for
iPod.
• Disconnecting the iPod will stop playback. Press SRC
to listen to another playback source.
12
• For connection, see Installation/Connection Manual
(separate volume).
• For details, refer also to the manual supplied with
your iPod.
To fast-forward or reverse the track
To go to the next or previous tracks
~ Connect an iPod.
Connection cable for iPod
Selecting a track from the menu
1
2
Enter the main menu.
If an iPod has been connected...
Now the 5/∞/4 /¢ buttons work as
the menu selecting buttons*.
Playback starts automatically from where it has
been paused previously.
Select the desired menu.
Ÿ Adjust the volume.
PLAYLIST Ô ARTISTS Ô ALBUMS Ô
SONGS Ô GENRES Ô COMPOSER Ô
(back to the beginning)
3
Confirm the selection.
! Adjust the sound as you want. (See
pages 14 and 15.)
To move back to the previous menu,
press 5.
Caution:
• If a track is selected, playback starts
automatically.
• Avoid using the iPod if it might hinder your safety
driving.
• Make sure all important data has been backed up
to avoid losing the data.
• If the selected item has another layer, you will
enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the
desired track is played (see page 21).
• Holding 4 /¢ can skip 10 items at a
time.
To pause playback
To resume playback, press the
button again.
* The menu selecting mode will be canceled:
– If no operations are done for about 5 seconds.
– When you confirm the selection of a track.
13
Selecting the playback modes
Sound adjustments
1
2
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the
music genre (iEQ: intelligent equalizer).
Select your desired playback mode.
1
2
7
Repeat play
Mode
Playback functions (as on iPod)
ONE RPT : Same as “Repeat One.”
Preset values
BAS*1 MID*2 TRE*3 S.BS*4
Indication (For)
ALL RPT
RPT OFF
: Same as “Repeat All.”
: Cancels.
7
Random play
USER
00
00
00 OFF
(Flat sound)
ROCK
(Rock or disco music)
Mode
Playback functions (as on iPod)
+03 00 +02 ON
+01 00 +03 OFF
+02 +01 +02 OFF
+04 –02 +01 ON
+03 00 +03 OFF
ALBM RND *: Same as “Shuffle Albums.”
CLASSIC
(Classical music)
SONG RND : Same as “Shuffle Songs.”
RND OFF : Cancels.
POPS
(Light music)
* Functions only if you select “ALL” in “ALBUMS” of
the main “MENU.”
HIP HOP
(Funk or rap music)
: Corresponding indicator lights up
on the display
JAZZ
(Jazz music)
To check other information while listening
to an iPod
*1 : Bass; *2 : Mid-range; *3 : Treble; *4 : Super bass
Adjusting the sound
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your
preference.
1
2
14
Indication, [Range]
General settings — PSM
BAS *1 (bass), [–06 to +06]
Adjust the bass.
MID *1 (mid-range), [–06 to +06]
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items
listed in the table that follows.
Adjust the mid-range frequencies sound level.
TRE *1 (treble), [–06 to +06]
1
Adjust the treble.
FAD *2 (fader), [R06 to F06]
Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.
2
Select a PSM item.
BAL (balance), [L06 to R06]
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.
S.BS *1 (super bass), [S.BS ON or S.BS OFF],
[01 to 05, initial: 03]*3
3
Adjust the PSM item selected.
Maintain the richness and fullness of the bass sound
regardless of how low you set the volume.
VOL (volume), [00 to 30 or 50 *4]
Adjust the volume.
4
5
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other PSM
items if necessary.
1
*
When you adjust the bass, mid-range, treble, or super
bass, the adjustment you have made is stored for the
currently selected sound mode (iEQ) including “USER.”
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader
level to “00.”
Range adjustment for super bass is adjustable only
when it is set to “S.BS ON.”
Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See
page 17 for details.)
Finish the procedure.
2
3
4
*
*
*
Continued on the next page
15
Indications
Item
: Initial)
Setting, [reference page]
(
DEMO
Display demonstration
• DEMO ON
:
Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no
operation is done for about 20 seconds, [6].
Cancels.
• DEMO OFF
:
:
CLK DISP *1
Clock display
• ON
Clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power is
turned off.
• OFF
:
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about
5 seconds when the power is turned off, [6].
CLOCK H
Hour adjustment
0 – 23
(1 – 12)
[Initial: 0 (0:00)], [6]
[Initial: 00 (0:00)], [6]
CLOCK M
00 – 59
Minute adjustment
24H/12H
Time display mode
• 24H
• 12H
:
:
See also page 6 for setting.
CLK ADJ *2
• AUTO
The built-in clock is automatically adjusted using the CT (clock
Clock adjustment
time) data in the RDS signal.
Cancels.
• OFF
:
:
AF-REG *2
Alternative frequency/
regionalization reception
• AF
When the currently received signals become weak, the unit
switches to another station (the programme may differ from the
one currently received), [10].
• The AF indicator lights up.
• AF REG
:
:
When the currently received signals become weak, the unit
switches to another station broadcasting the same programme.
• The AF and REG indicators light up.
• OFF
Cancels.
PTY-STBY *2
PTY standby
OFF, PTY
codes
Activates PTY Standby Reception with one of the PTY codes, [9,10].
TA VOL *2
Traffic announcement
volume
VOL 00 – VOL [Initial: VOL 15]
30 or 50 *3
P-SEARCH *2
Programme search
• ON
• OFF
:
:
Activates Programme Search, [10].
Cancels.
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select “OFF” to
save the car’s battery.
Only for FM RDS stations.
Depends on the amplifier gain control.
2
3
*
*
16
Indications
Item
: Initial)
Setting, [reference page]
(
DIMMER
Dimmer
• ON
• OFF
:
:
Activates dimmer.
Cancels.
TEL
• MUTING 1/
MUTING 2
• OFF
:
:
Select either one which mutes the sounds while using a cellular
phone.
Cancels.
Telephone muting
SCROLL *4
Scroll
• ONCE
• AUTO
• OFF
:
:
:
Scrolls the track information once.
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).
Cancels.
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display
regardless of the setting.
AUX ADJ
Auxiliary input level
adjustment
A.ADJ 00
– A.ADJ 05
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase
of the output level when changing the source from external
component connected to the AUX input jack on the control panel.
TAG DISP
Tag display
• TAG ON
• TAG OFF
:
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [12].
Cancels.
AMP GAIN
Amplifier gain control
• LOW PWR
:
VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the
speaker is less than 50 W to prevent damaging the speaker.)
VOL 00 – VOL 50
• HIGH PWR
:
:
IF BAND
Intermediate frequency
band
• AUTO
Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises
between close stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)
Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but sound
quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.
• WIDE
:
4
*
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.
17
More about this unit
External component
operations
Basic operations
Turning on the power
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the
power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.
You can connect an external component to the
AUX (auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.
Turning off the power
• If you turn off the power while listening to a track,
playback starts from where it has been stopped
previously, next time you turn on the power.
General
• If you change the source while listening to a disc or
an iPod, playback stops.
Next time you select “CD” or “IPOD” as the playback
source, playback starts from where it has been
stopped/paused previously.
~
• After ejecting a disc or disconnecting an iPod,
“NO DISC” or “NO IPOD” appears and you cannot
operate some of the buttons. Insert another disc,
reconnect an iPod, or press SRC to select another
playback source.
Ÿ Turn on the connected component and
start playing the source.
! Adjust the volume.
Tuner operations
Storing stations in memory
• During SSM search...
– All previously stored stations are erased and
stations are stored newly.
⁄ Adjust the sound as you want. (See
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).
– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will
be automatically tuned in.
pages 14 and 15.)
• When storing a station manually, the previously
preset station is erased when a new station is stored
in the same preset number.
To check other information while listening
to an external component
AUX IN Ô Clock
FM RDS operations
• Network-Tracking Reception requires two types of
RDS signals—PI (Programme Identification) and AF
(Alternative Frequency) to work correctly. Without
receiving these data correctly, Network-Tracking
Reception will not operate correctly.
18
• If a Traffic Announcement is received by TA Standby
Reception, the volume level automatically changes to
the preset level (TA VOL) if the current level is lower
than the preset level.
• When Alternative Frequency Reception is activated
(with AF selected), Network-Tracking Reception is
also activated automatically. (See page 16.)
• If you want to know more about RDS, visit
<http://www.rds.org.uk>.
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.
– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are written with
“Packet Write” method.
– There are improper recording conditions (missing
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,
warped, etc.).
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular
CDs.
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective seal stuck
to the surface.
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an
ink jet printer.
Using these discs under high temperatures or high
humidities may cause malfunctions or damage to the
unit.
Disc operations
Caution for DualDisc playback
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on
this product may not be recommended.
General
Playing an MP3/WMA disc
• This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs/CD
Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs (Rewritable)
in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3 and WMA formats.
• When a disc is inserted upside down, “PLEASE” and
“EJECT” appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to
eject the disc.
• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are
used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or
WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of
the letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No
other characters can be correctly displayed.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the
conditions below:
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps
– Sampling frequency:
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
• This unit can play back only files of the same type
which are first detected if a disc includes both audio
CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this
unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the
following reasons:
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo,
Joliet, Windows long file name
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder
names vary among the disc format used (includes 4
extension characters—<.mp3> or <.wma>).
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters
– Romeo: up to 128 characters
– Discs are dirty or scratched.
– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens inside
the unit.
– Joliet: up to 64 characters
– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters
Continued on the next page
19
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of 200
folders, and of 8 hierarchies.
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable
bit rate).
• If your iPod software version is older than those
mentioned above, you may not be able to control the
iPod properly. Update your iPod to the latest software
version before using it with this unit.
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed
time display, and do not show the actual elapsed
time. Especially, after performing the search function,
this difference becomes noticeable.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and
voice format.
– WMA files which are not based upon Windows
Media® Audio.
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have the data such as AIFF, ATRAC3,
etc.
– You can check the software version of your iPod
from “About” in the “Setting” menu of the iPod.
– For details about updating your iPod, visit
<http://www.apple.com>.
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod is charged
through this unit.
• While the iPod is connected, all operations from the
iPod are disabled. Perform all operations from this
unit.
• While connecting an iPod with Video:
– No video shows on the iPod’s display or the
external monitor (only the audio part is available).
– It is not possible to browse video files on the
“Video“ menu. (If you connect the iPod during
playback or pausing of a video file, resuming
playback will not work.)
• The search function works but search speed is not
constant.
• iPod shuffle is not controllable.
• You can control the iPod from this unit when “JVC” or
Ejecting a disc
“
” appears on the iPod display.
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,
the disc is automatically inserted again into the
loading slot to protect it from dust. Playback starts
automatically.
• The songs order displayed on the selecting menu of
this unit may differ from the iPod.
• If playback is stopped, select a track from the
selecting menu or press ∞.
• The text information may not be displayed correctly.
– Some characters such as accented letters cannot be
shown correctly on the display.
– Depends on the condition of communication
between the iPod and the unit.
• If the text information includes more than 8
characters, it scrolls on the display. This unit can
display up to 40 characters.
iPod operations
Controllable iPod
Software version
iPod with dock connector
(3rd Generation)
2.3 or later
iPod with Click Wheel
(4th Generation)
3.1 or later
iPod mini
iPod photo
iPod nano
1.4 or later
1.2 or later
1.0 or later
1.0 or later
General settings—PSM
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from
“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the volume level
is set higher than “VOL 30,” the unit automatically
changes the volume level to “VOL 30.”
iPod with Video
(5th Generation)
20
Hierarchical structure of file searching when an iPod is connected
21
To keep discs clean
Maintenance
A dirty disc may not play correctly.
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with
a soft cloth in a straight line from center
to edge.
• Do not use any solvent (for example, conventional
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean
discs.
How to clean the connectors
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.
To play new discs
New discs may have some rough spots
around the inner and outer edges. If
such a disc is used, this unit may reject
the disc.
Connector
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in
the following cases:
• After starting the heater in the car.
Do not use the following discs:
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a
few hours until the moisture evaporates.
Warped disc
Sticker
Sticker residue
How to handle discs
When removing a disc from its
case, press down the center holder
of the case and lift the disc out,
holding it by the edges.
Center holder
Stick-on label
• Always hold the disc by the edges.
Do not touch its recording surface.
Unusual shape
When storing a disc into its case, gently insert the
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface
facing up).
Single CD (8 cm disc)
• Make sure to store discs into the cases after use.
22
Troubleshooting
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
• The unit does not work at all.
Reset the unit (see page 2).
Store stations manually.
Connect the aerial firmly.
Insert the disc correctly.
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.
• Static noise while listening to the radio.
• Disc cannot be played back.
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be
skipped.
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which
you used for recording.
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 11).
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
• Change the disc.
• Check the cords and connections.
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.
• Disc cannot be played back.
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in the
format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2,
Romeo, or Joliet.
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the
file names.
• Noise is generated.
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or
WMA tracks.)
• A longer readout time is required (“CHECK” Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.
keeps flashing on the display).
Continued on the next page
23
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Tracks do not play back in the order you
have intended them to play.
Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.
• Elapsed playing time is not correct.
This sometimes occurs during play. This is caused by how
the tracks are recorded on the disc.
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT” appear alternately
on the display.
Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.
• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.
album name).
This unit can only display letters (upper case), numbers,
and a limited number of symbols.
• The iPod does not turn on or does not
work.
• Check the connecting cable and its connection.
• Update the firmware version.
• Charge the battery.
• The sound is distorted.
Deactivate the equalizer either on the unit or the iPod.
• “NO IPOD” appears on the display.
• Check the connecting cable and its connection.
• Charge the battery.
• Playback stops.
The headphones are disconnected during playback. Turn
off the unit‘s power and turn it on again.
• No sound can be heard when connecting
an iPod nano.
• Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.
• Update the firmware version of the iPod nano.
• “NO FILES” appears on the display.
No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod.
Reconnect the iPod.
• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on the
display.
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.
Check the connecting cable and its connection.
Reset the iPod.
• The iPod’s controls do not work after
disconnecting from this unit.
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
• iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
24
Specifications
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION
Maximum Power Output:
CD PLAYER SECTION
Type:
Compact disc player
Front/Rear:
Continuous Power Output (RMS):
50 W per channel
Signal Detection
System:
Non-contact optical pickup
(semiconductor laser)
Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)
Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
Front/Rear:
19 W per channel into
4 Ω, 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at
no more than 0.8% total
harmonic distortion.
Dynamic Range:
96 dB
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB
Load Impedance:
Tone Control Range:
Bass/Mid-range/
Treble:
Frequency Response:
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)
Wow and Flutter:
Less than measurable limit
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)
12 dB at 60 Hz/1 kHz/
7.5 kHz
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz
Max. Bit Rate:
320 kbps
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:
Max. Bit Rate:
192 kbps
Line-Out Level
Impedance:
Output Impedance:
Other Terminal:
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
GENERAL
Power Requirement:
1 kΩ
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V
(11 V to 16 V allowance)
Negative ground
AUX (auxiliary) input jack,
iPod jack, Steering wheel
remote input
Grounding System:
Allowable Operating 0°C to +40°C
Temperature:
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.)
Installation Size:
Panel Size:
Mass:
TUNER SECTION
Frequency Range:
FM:
AM:
182 mm × 52 mm × 150 mm
187 mm × 58 mm × 13 mm
1.3 kg
(excluding accessories)
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
MW: 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz
LW: 144 kHz to 279 kHz
FM Tuner
Usable Sensitivity:
50 dB Quieting
Sensitivity:
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
Design and specifications are subject to change without
notice.
Alternate Channel
Selectivity (400 kHz):
Frequency Response:
Stereo Separation:
MW Tuner
65 dB
40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
30 dB
Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB
LW Tuner
Sensitivity:
50 μV
25
Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit
Vous avez des PROBLÈMES de fonctionnement?
Réinitialisez votre appareil
Référez-vous à la page intitulée Comment réinitialiser votre appareil
Dear Customer,
Cher(e) client(e),
This apparatus is in conformance with the valid European
directives and standards regarding electromagnetic
compatibility and electrical safety.
Cet appareil est conforme aux directives et normes
européennes en vigueur concernant la compatibilité
électromagnétique et à la sécurité électrique.
European representative of Victor Company of Japan, Limited
is:
Représentant européen de la société Victor Company of Japan,
Limited:
JVC Technology Centre Europe GmbH
Postfach 10 05 52
61145 Friedberg
JVC Technology Centre Europe GmbH
Postfach 10 05 52
61145 Friedberg
Allemagne
Germany
EN, FR
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
0107DTSMDTJEIN
KD-PDR31
Installation/Connection Manual
Manuel d’installation/raccordement
0107DTSMDTJEIN
EN, FR
GET0469-010A
[EX/EU]
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
ENGLISH
FRANÇAIS
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle
does not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC IN-CAR
ENTERTAINMENT dealers.
Cet appareil est conçu pour fonctionner sur des sources de courant continu de 12 V à masse NEGATIVE.
Si votre véhicule n’offre pas ce type d’alimentation, il vous faut un convertisseur de tension, que vous pouvez
acheter chez un revendeur d’autoradios JVC.
WARNINGS
AVERTISSEMENTS
Pour éviter tout court-circuit, nous vous recommandons de débrancher la borne négative de la batterie et
d’effectuer tous les raccordements électriques avant d’installer l’appareil.
• Assurez-vous de raccorder de nouveau la mise à la masse de cet appareil au châssis de la
voiture après l’installation.
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all
electrical connections before installing the unit.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.
Notes:
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC IN-CAR
ENTERTAINMENT dealer.
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at
the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than
50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 17 of the
INSTRUCTIONS).
Remarques:
• Remplacer le fusible par un de la valeur précisée. Si le fusible saute souvent, consulter votre revendeur
d’autoradios JVC.
• Il est recommandé de connecter des enceintes avec une puissance de plus de 50 W (les enceintes arrière
et les enceintes avant, avec une impédance comprise entre 4 Ω et 8 Ω). Si la puissance maximum est
inférieure à 50 W, changez “AMP GAIN” pour éviter d’endommager vos enceintes (voir page 17 du
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.
• Pour éviter les court-circuits, couvrir les bornes des fils qui ne sont PAS UTILISÉS avec de la bande
isolante.
• Le dissipateur de chaleur devient très chaud après usage. Faire attention de ne pas le toucher en retirant
cet appareil.
Heat sink
Dissipateur de chaleur
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:
PRECAUTIONS sur l’alimentation et la connexion des enceintes:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit
will be seriously damaged.
• NE CONNECTEZ PAS les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation à la batterie; sinon,
l’appareil serait sérieusement endommagé.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in
your car.
• AVANT de connecter les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation aux enceintes, vérifiez le câblage des
enceintes de votre voiture.
Parts list for installation and connection
Liste des pièces pour l’installation et raccordement
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC IN-CAR
ENTERTAINMENT dealer immediately.
Les pièces suivantes sont fournies avec cet appareil. Si quelque chose manquait, consultez votre revendeur
autoradio JVC immédiatement.
A / B
C
D
E
Hard case/Control panel
Etui de transport/Panneau de commande
Sleeve
Manchon
Trim plate
Plaque d’assemblage
Power cord
Cordon d’alimentation
F
G
H
I
Connection cable for iPod
Câble de connexion pour iPod
Cable tie
Collier pour câble
Washer (ø5)
Rondelle (ø5)
Lock nut (M5)
Ecrou d’arrêt (M5)
K
L
M
N
J
Rubber cushion
Amortisseur en caoutchouc
Handles
Poignées
Remote controller
Télécommande
Battery
Pile
Mounting bolt (M5 × 20 mm)
Boulon de montage (M5 × 20 mm)
1
INSTALLATION (MONTAGE DANS LE TABLEAU DE BORD)
L’illustration suivante est un exemple d’installation typique. Si vous avez des questions ou avez besoin
d’information sur des kits d’installation, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC ou une compagnie
d’approvisionnement.
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company supplying
kits.
• Si l’on n’est pas sûr de pouvoir installer correctement cet appareil, le faire installer par un technicien
qualifié.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.
Do the required electrical connections.
Réalisez les connexions électriques.
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the
sleeve firmly in place.
Tordez les languettes appropriées
pour maintenir le manchon en place.
Removing the unit
Retrait de l’appareil
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.
Avant de retirer l’appareil, libérer la section arrière.
Insert the two handles, then pull them as
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.
Insérez les deux poignées, puis tirez de la façon
illustrée de façon à retirer l’appareil.
When using the optional stay / Lors de l’utilisation du
hauban en option
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Lors de l’installation de l’appareil
scans utiliser de manchon
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
Dans une voiture Toyota, par exemple, retirez d’abord l’autoradio et installez l’appareil à sa place.
Stay (option)
Hauban (en option)
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Vis à tête plate (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Fire wall
Cloison
Dashboard
Tableau de bord
Bracket*2
Support*2
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Vis à tête plate (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Screw (option)
Vis (en option)
Pocket
Poche
Bracket*2
Support*2
Note
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws
are used, they could damage the unit.
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.
Installez l’appareil avec un angle de moins
de 30˚.
Remarque : Lors de l’installation de l’appareil sur le support de montage, s’assurer d’utiliser des vis d’une longueur de
8 mm. Si des vis plus longues sont utilisées, elles peuvent endommager l’appareil.
1
1
*
*
Lorsque vous mettez l’appareil à la verticale, faire attention de ne pas endommager le fusible situé sur l’arrière.
Non fourni avec cet autoradio.
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.
Not supplied for this unit.
2
2
2
ENGLISH
FRANÇAIS
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
RACCORDEMENTS ELECTRIQUES
If your car is equipped with the ISO
connector / Si votre voiture est équippée
d’un connecteur ISO
For some VW/Audi or Opel (Vauxhall) automobile / Pour certaine voiture VW/Audi ou Opel
(Vauxhall)
You may need to modify the wiring of the supplied power cord as illustrated.
• Contact your authorized car dealer before installing this unit.
Vous aurrez peut-être besoin de modifier le câblage du cordon d’alimentation fourni comme montré sur l’illustration.
• Contactez votre revendeur automobile autorisé avant d’installer l’appareil.
A
• Connect the ISO connectors as illustrated.
• Connectez les connecteurs ISO comme montré sur l’illustration.
From the car body
De la carrosserie de la
voiture
Original wiring / Câblage original
Modified wiring 1 / Câblage modifié 1
A
C
B
D
E
F
G
H
ISO connector
Connecteur ISO
Use modified wiring 2 if the unit does not turn on.
Utilisez le câblage modifié 2 si l’appareil ne se met pas sous tension.
ISO connector of the supplied power cord
Connecteur ISO pour le cordon d’alimentation
fourni
I
J
L
K
M
O
N
P
Modified wiring 2 / Câblage modifié 2
Y: Yellow
Jaune
R: Red
Rouge
View from the lead side
Vue à partir du côté des fils
Connections without using the ISO connectors / Connexions sans l’utilisation des connecteurs ISO
B
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious
damage to this unit.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.
Avant de commencer la connexion: Vérifiez attentivement le câblage du véhicule. Une connexion
incorrecte peut endommager sérieusement l’appareil.
Le fil du cordon d’alimentation et ceux des connecteurs du châssis de la voiture peuvent être différents en
couleur.
1 Cut the ISO connector.
2 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.
3 Connect the aerial cord.
1 Coupez le connecteur ISO.
2
Connectez les fils colorés du cordon d’alimentation dans l’ordre spécifié sur l’illustration ci-dessous.
3 Connectez le cordon d’antenne.
4 Finalement, connectez le faisceau de fils à l’appareil.
4 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.
To steering wheel remote controller (see diagram
Pour la télécommande de volant (voir le diagramme
)
)
Loop (see diagram
Boucle (voir le diagramme
)
)
Rear ground terminal
Borne arrière de masse
15 A fuse
Fusible 15 A
Aerial terminal
Borne de l’antenne
iPod jack
(see diagram
Prise iPod
)
Ignition switch
Interrupteur d’allumage
(voir le diagramme
)
Black
Noir
To metallic body or chassis of the car
Vers corps métallique ou châssis de la voiture
Line out (see diagram
)
Sortie de ligne (voir le
Yellow*2
Jaune*2
diagramme
)
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing
the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
À une borne sous tension du porte-fusible connectée à la batterie de la
voiture (en dérivant l’interrupteur d’allumage) (12 V constant)
Red
Rouge
Fuse block
Porte-fusible
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
Vers borne accessoire du porte-fusible
Blue with white stripe
Bleu avec bande blanche
To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any (200 mA max.)
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne automatique s’il y en a une
(200 mA max.)
Brown
Marron
To cellular phone system
À un système de téléphone cellulaire
White with black stripe
Blanc avec bande noire
White
Blanc
Gray with black stripe
Gris avec bande noire
Gray
Gris
Green with black stripe
Vert avec bande noire
Green
Vert
Purple with black stripe
Violet avec bande noire
Purple
Violet
Left speaker (front)
Enceinte gauche (avant)
Right speaker (front)
Enceinte droit (avant)
Left speaker (rear)
Enceinte gauche (arrière)
Right speaker (rear)
Enceinte droit (arrière)
1
1
2
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.
*
*
Non fourni avec cet autoradio.
Pour vérifier le fonctionnement de cet appareil avant installation, ce fil doit être raccordé, sinon l’appareil ne peut
pas être mis sous tension.
2
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise power
cannot be turned on.
3
Connecting the external amplifier / Connexion d’un amplificateur extérieur
C
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.
Vous pouvez connecter un amplificateur pour améliorer votre système autoradio.
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it
can be controlled through this unit.
• Connectez le fil de commande à distance (bleu avec bande blanche) au fil de commande à distance de
l’autre appareil de façon qu’il puisse être commandé via cet appareil.
•
Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of • Déconnectez les enceintes de cet appareil et connectez-les à l’amplificateur. Laissez les fils
this unit unused.
d’enceintes de cet appareil inutilisés.
Remote lead
Fil d’alimentation à distance
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
Connecteur Y (non fourni avec cet autoradio)
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)
Fil d’alimentation à distance (bleu avec bande blanche)
Rear speakers
Enceintes arrière
To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne automatique s’il
y en a une
JVC Amplifier
JVC Amplificateur
Rear speakers
Enceintes arrière
Front speakers (see diagram
Enceintes avant (voir le diagramme
)
)
D Connecting to the steering wheel remote controller / Connexion de la télécommande de volant
If your car is equipped with the steering wheel remote controller, you can operate this unit using the
controller. To do it, a JVC’s OE remote adapter (not supplied) which matches with your car is required.
Consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer for details.
Steering wheel remote input
Entrée de la télécommande de volant
OE remote adapter (not supplied)
Adaptateur pour télécommande au volant (non fourni)
Si votre voiture est munie d’une télécommande de volant, vous pouvez commander cet autoradio en
utilisant la télécommande. Pour le faire, un adaptateur pour télécommande au volant JVC (non fourni)
correspondant à votre voiture est nécessaire. Consultez votre revendeur d’autoradio JVC pour les détails.
Steering wheel remote controller (equipped in the car)
Télécommande de volant (installée dans la voiture)
Connecting an Apple iPod / Connexion d’un iPod Apple
E
Apple iPod (separately purchased)
iPod Apple (vendu séparément)
You can connect an iPod to this unit using the supplied connection cable for iPod.
1 Insert the supplied cable tie across the loop.
Cable tie
Collier pour câble
2 Press in the head of the connection cable for iPod until you hear a clicking sound.
3 Fasten the connection cable using the cable tie to firmly hold the connection cable in place.
Vous pouvez connecter un iPod à cet appareil en utilisant le câble de connexion du iPod fourni.
1 Insérez le collier pour câble fourni dans la boucle.
2 Faite pression sur la tête du câble de connexion pour iPod jusqu’à ce que vous entendiez un déclic.
3 Fixez le câble de connexion en utilisant le collier pour câble pour le maintenir solidement le câble de
connexion en place.
Connection cable for iPod (supplied)
Câble de connexion pour iPod (fourni)
Loop
Boucle
iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
iPod est une marque de commerce d’Apple Computer, Inc., enregistrée aux États-Unis et dans les autres pays.
3
3
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint
(if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
*
Attachez solidement le fil de mise à la masse au châssis métallique de la voiture—à un endroit qui n’est pas
recouvert de peinture (s’il est recouvert de peinture, enlevez d’abord la peinture avant d’attacher le fil). L’appareil
peut être endommagé si cela n’est pas fait correctement.
Cordon de signal (non fourni avec cet autoradio)
Coupez les fils des enceintes arrière du connecteur ISO de la voiture et connectez-les à l’amplificateur.
4
5
*
*
4
5
*
*
Cut the rear speaker leads of the car’s ISO connector and connect them to the amplifier.
TROUBLESHOOTING
• The fuse blows.
EN CAS DE DIFFICULTES
• Le fusible saute.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?
* Les fils rouge et noir sont-ils racordés correctement?
• Power cannot be turned on.
• L’appareil ne peut pas être mise sous tension.
* Is the yellow lead connected?
* Le fil jaune est-elle raccordée?
• No sound from the speakers.
• Pas de son des enceintes.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il court-circuité?
• Sound is distorted.
• Le son est déformé.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble à la masse?
• Noise interfere with sounds.
• Interférence avec les sons.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?
* La prise arrière de mise à la terre est-elle connectée au châssis de la voiture avec un cordon court et épais?
• This unit becomes hot.
• Cet appareil devient chaud.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble à la masse?
• This unit does not work at all.
• Cet appareil ne fonctionne pas du tout.
* Have you reset your unit?
* Avez-vous réinitialisé votre appareil?
4
CD RECEIVER
CD-RECEIVER
РЕСИВЕР С ПРОИГРЫВАТЕЛЕМ КОМПАКТ-ДИСКОВ
KD-PDR31
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.
Zum Abbrechen der Displaydemonstration siehe Seite 6.
Информацию об отмене демонстрации функций дисплея см. на стр. 6.
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.
Für den Einbau und die Anschlüsse siehe das eigenständige Handbuch.
Указания по установке и выполнению соединений приводятся в отдельной инструкции.
INSTRUCTIONS
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ
GET0469-006A
[EY]
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best
possible performance from the unit.
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical
instruments.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.
How to reset your unit
Warning:
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be
sure to look ahead carefully or you may be involved
in a traffic accident.
This symbol is only valid in
the European Union.
•
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.
How to forcibly eject a disc
Information for Users on Disposal of Old
Equipment
This symbol indicates that the product with
this symbol should not be disposed as general
household waste at its end-of-life. If you wish to
dispose of this product, please do so in accordance
with applicable national legislation or other rules in
your country and municipality. By disposing of this
product correctly, you will help to conserve natural
resources and will help prevent potential negative
effects on the environment and human health.
•
•
Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.
If this does not work, reset your unit.
2
How to use the M MODE button
CONTENTS
If you press M MODE, the unit goes into functions mode,
then the number buttons and 5/∞ buttons work as
different function buttons.
Control panel ..................................
Remote controller — RM-RK50 .............
4
5
Ex.: When number button 2 works as
MO (monaural) button.
Getting started................................
Basic operations...................................................
6
6
Radio operations .............................
7
FM RDS operations...........................
Searching for your favorite FM RDS programme....
8
8
To use these buttons for their original functions
again after pressing M MODE, wait for 5 seconds
without pressing any of these buttons until the
functions mode is cleared or press M MODE again.
Disc operations................................ 10
Playing a disc in the unit ..................................... 10
iPod operations ............................... 12
Sound adjustments.......................... 14
General settings — PSM .................. 15
External component operations ....... 18
More about this unit ........................ 18
Maintenance ................................... 22
Troubleshooting.............................. 23
Specifications.................................. 25
Detaching the control panel
Attaching the control panel
Caution on volume setting:
For security reasons, a numbered ID card is provided
with this unit, and the same ID number is imprinted on
the unit’s chassis. Keep the card in a safe place, as it will
help the authorities to identify your unit if stolen.
For safety...
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any complicated
operations.
Discs produce very little noise compared with other
sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc
to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden
increase of the output level.
Temperature inside the car...
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes
normal before operating the unit.
3
Control panel
Parts identification
Display window
1
Control dial
;
a
s
d
RND (random) button
M MODE button
(control panel release) button
Disc information indicators—
TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)
DISC indicator
Playback mode / item indicators—RND (random),
(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)
RDS indicators—AF, REG, TP, PTY
Tuner reception indicators—MO (monaural),
ST (stereo)
S.BASS (super bass) indicator
EQ (equalizer) indicator
Tr (track) indicator
Source display / Time countdown indicator
Main display
Sound mode (iEQ: intelligent equalizer)
indicators—JAZZ, ROCK, HIP HOP, CLASSIC, POPS,
USER
2 0 (eject) button
3
4
5
Loading slot
T/P (traffic programme/programme type) button
DISP (display) button
6 4 /¢ buttons
f
g
7
8
9
Display window
(standby/on attenuator) button
AUX (auxiliary) input jack
h
j
p 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons
q
w
e
r
SEL (select) button
BAND button
SRC (source) button
Remote sensor
DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).
EQ (equalizer) button
MO (monaural) button
SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button
Number buttons
k
l
/
z
x
c
t
y
u
i
o
RPT (repeat) button
4
Main elements and features
Remote controller —
RM-RK50
Installing the lithium coin battery
(CR2025)
1
(standby/on/attenuator) button
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or
attenuates the sound when the power is on.
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.
Aim the remote controller directly at the remote
sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle
in between.
2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons
• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.
• Changes the preset stations with D ∞.
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA discs.
• While listening to an Apple iPod:
– Pauses or resumes playback with D ∞.
– Enters the main menu with 5 U.
(Now 5 U/D ∞/2 R/F 3 work as the menu
selecting buttons.)*
Warning:
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or
its equivalent; otherwise, it may explode.
• Do not leave the remote controller in a place
(such as dashboards) exposed to direct sunlight
for a long time; otherwise, it may explode.
• Store the battery in a place where children
cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.
• To prevent the battery from over-heating,
cracking, or starting a fire:
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the
battery, or dispose of it in a fire.
– Do not leave the battery with other metallic
materials.
3
4
5
VOL – / VOL + buttons
• Adjusts the volume level.
SOUND button
•
Selects the sound mode (iEQ: intelligent equalizer).
SOURCE button
• Selects the source.
6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and
held.
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar
tools.
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when
throwing away or saving it.
• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.
• While listening to an iPod (in menu selecting
mode):
– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then, press
D ∞ to confirm the selection.)
– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and held.
This unit is equipped with the steering wheel
remote control function.
• See the Installation/Connection Manual (separate
volume) for connection.
* 5 U : Returns to the previous menu.
D ∞ : Confirms the selection.
5
Basic settings
Getting started
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages
15 – 17.
Basic operations
~ Turn on the power.
1
2
Ÿ
1
2
Canceling the display demonstrations
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”
Setting the clock
Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust the hour.
Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then adjust the
minute.
Select “24H/12H,” then “24H” (hour) or “12H”
(hour).
1
*
You cannot select “CD” as the playback source
if there is no disc in the unit.
“NO IPOD” appears if iPod is not connected.
2
*
! For FM/AM tuner
3
Finish the procedure.
⁄ Adjust the volume.
To check the current clock time while the
power is turned off
Clock time is shown on the
display for about 5 seconds. See
also page 16.
VOL 20
Volume level appears.
@ Adjust the sound as you want. (See
pages 14 and 15.)
To drop the volume in
a moment (ATT)
To restore the sound, press
the button again.
To turn off the power
6
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to
receive
Radio operations
~
Lights up when monaural mode is activated.
Ÿ
Lights up when receiving an FM stereo
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.
MONO
Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.
88.3
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same
procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO indicator
goes off.
! Start searching for a station.
Storing stations in memory
When a station is received, searching stops.
To stop searching, press the same button
again.
You can preset six stations for each band.
FM station automatic presetting—
SSM (Strong-station Sequential
Memory)
To tune in to a station manually
In step ! above...
1
1
Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to
store into.
2
3
92.5
M
2
Select a desired station frequency.
SSM
“SSM” flashes, then disappears when automatic
presetting is over.
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are
searched and stored automatically in the FM band.
7
Manual presetting
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset
number 4 of the FM1 band.
FM RDS operations
What you can do with RDS
RDS (Radio Data System) allows FM stations to send an
additional signal along with their regular programme
signals.
1
By receiving the RDS data, this unit can do the
following:
• Programme Type (PTY) Search (see the following)
• TA (Traffic Announcement) and PTY Standby
Receptions (see pages 9 and 16)
• Tracing the same programme automatically
—Network-Tracking Reception (see page 10)
• Programme Search (see pages 10 and 16)
2
FM I 92.5
3
P4
92.5
Preset number flashes for a while.
Searching for your favorite
FM RDS programme
You can tune in to a station broadcasting your favorite
programme by searching for a PTY code.
Listening to a preset station
1
2
• To store your favorite programme types, see page 9.
Select the preset station (1 – 6) you want.
~
The last selected PTY code
appears.
Ÿ Select one of your favorite programme
or
types.
or
Select one of the PTY codes (see page
10).
To check the current clock time while
listening to an FM (non-RDS) or AM station
• For FM RDS stations, see page 10.
Frequency Ô Clock
8
! Start searching for your favorite
Using the standby receptions
TA Standby Reception
programme.
TA Standby Reception allows the unit to switch
temporarily to Traffic Announcement (TA) from any
source other than AM.
If there is a station broadcasting a programme
of the same PTY code as you have selected, that
station is tuned in.
The volume changes to the preset TA volume level if the
current level is lower than the preset level (see page
16).
To activate TA Standby Reception
The TP (Traffic Programme) indicator
either lights up or flashes.
Storing your favorite programme
types
• If the TP indicator lights up, TA Standby Reception is
activated.
You can store six favorite programme types.
• If the TP indicator flashes, TA Standby Reception is
not yet activated. (This occurs when you are listening
to an FM station without the RDS signals required for
TA Standby Reception.)
Preset programme types in the number buttons
(1 to 6):
To activate TA Standby Reception, tune in to another
station providing these signals. The TP indicator will
stop flashing and remain lit.
1
2
Select a PTY code (see steps ~ to ! on
pages 8 and 9).
To deactivate the TA Standby Reception
Select the preset number (1 – 6) you want to
store into.
The TP indicator goes off.
PTY Standby Reception
PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to switch
temporarily to your favorite PTY programme from any
source other than AM.
To activate and select your favorite PTY code for
PTY Standby Reception, see page 16.
The PTY indicator either lights up or flashes.
• If the PTY indicator lights up, PTY Standby Reception
is activated.
Ex.: When “ROCK M” is selected
3
4
Repeat steps 1 and 2 to store other PTY codes
into other preset numbers.
• If the PTY indicator flashes, PTY Standby Reception is
not yet activated.
Finish the procedure.
To activate PTY Standby Reception, tune in to another
station providing these signals. The PTY indicator will
stop flashing and remain lit.
Continued on the next page
9
To deactivate the PTY Standby Reception, select
“OFF” for the PTY code (see page 16). The PTY indicator
goes off.
To check the current clock time while
listening to an FM RDS station
Station name (PS) = Station
Frequency = Programme
type (PTY) = Clock = (back to
the beginning)
Tracing the same programme—
Network-Tracking Reception
When driving in an area where FM reception is not
sufficient enough, this unit automatically tunes in to
another FM RDS station of the same network, possibly
broadcasting the same programme with stronger
signals (see the illustration below).
PTY codes
NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, SPORT, EDUCATE, DRAMA,
CULTURE, SCIENCE, VARIED, POP M (music), ROCK
M (music), EASY M (music), LIGHT M (music),
CLASSICS, OTHER M (music), WEATHER, FINANCE,
CHILDREN, SOCIAL, RELIGION, PHONE IN, TRAVEL,
LEISURE, JAZZ, COUNTRY, NATION M (music),
OLDIES, FOLK M (music), DOCUMENT
When shipped from the factory, Network-Tracking
Reception is activated.
To change the Network-Tracking Reception
setting, see “AF-REG” on page 16.
Programme A broadcasting on different frequency areas
(01 – 05)
Disc operations
Playing a disc in the unit
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the
source or eject the disc.
Automatic station selection—
Programme Search
Usually when you press the number buttons, the preset
station is tuned in.
To stop play and eject the disc
If the signals from the FM RDS preset station are not
sufficient for good reception, this unit, using the AF
data, tunes in to another frequency broadcasting the
same programme as the original preset station is
broadcasting.
• Press SRC to listen to another
playback source.
• The unit takes some time to tune in to another
station using programme search.
• See also page 16.
10
To fast-forward or reverse the track
To go to the next or previous tracks
Other main functions
Skipping tracks quickly during play
• For MP3 or WMA discs, you can skip tracks within the
same folder.
Ex.: To select track 32 while playing tracks whose
number is a single digit (1 to 9)
1
2
To go to the next or previous folders (only for
MP3 or WMA discs)
Each time you press the button, you can skip 10
tracks.
• After the last track, the first track will be selected
and vice versa.
To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder
(for MP3 or WMA discs) directly
To select a number from 01 – 06:
3
To select a number from 07 – 12:
Prohibiting disc ejection
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.
• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA discs, it
is required that folders are assigned with 2-digit
numbers at the beginning of their folder names—
01, 02, 03, and so on.
NO EJECT
To select a particular track in a folder
(for MP3 or WMA disc):
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same
procedure.
11
Changing the display information
Selecting the playback modes
You can use only one of the following playback modes
at a time.
While playing an audio CD or a
CD Text
1
2
Select your desired playback mode.
Repeat play
Mode Plays repeatedly
7
While playing an MP3 or a WMA track
• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG ON”
(see page 17)
TRK RPT : The current track.
FLDR RPT * : All tracks of the current folder.
RPT OFF : Cancels.
7
Random play
• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG OFF”
Mode Plays at random
FLDR RND *: All tracks of the current folder, then
tracks of the next folder and so on.
DISC RND : All tracks of the current disc.
: Elapsed playing time with the current
track number
: Clock with the current track number
: Corresponding indicator lights up on the
display
RND OFF : Cancels.
* Only while playing an MP3 or a WMA disc.
: Corresponding indicator lights up on
the display
1
2
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information,
folder name and file name appear. In this case, the
TAG indicator will not light up.
iPod operations
You can play songs from an Apple iPod through this unit
by connecting it with the supplied connection cable for
iPod.
• Disconnecting the iPod will stop playback. Press SRC
to listen to another playback source.
12
• For connection, see Installation/Connection Manual
(separate volume).
• For details, refer also to the manual supplied with
your iPod.
To fast-forward or reverse the track
To go to the next or previous tracks
~ Connect an iPod.
Connection cable for iPod
Selecting a track from the menu
1
2
Enter the main menu.
If an iPod has been connected...
Now the 5/∞/4 /¢ buttons work as
the menu selecting buttons*.
Playback starts automatically from where it has
been paused previously.
Select the desired menu.
Ÿ Adjust the volume.
PLAYLIST Ô ARTISTS Ô ALBUMS Ô
SONGS Ô GENRES Ô COMPOSER Ô
(back to the beginning)
3
Confirm the selection.
! Adjust the sound as you want. (See
pages 14 and 15.)
To move back to the previous menu,
press 5.
Caution:
• If a track is selected, playback starts
automatically.
• Avoid using the iPod if it might hinder your safety
driving.
• Make sure all important data has been backed up
to avoid losing the data.
• If the selected item has another layer, you will
enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the
desired track is played (see page 21).
• Holding 4 /¢ can skip 10 items at a
time.
To pause playback
To resume playback, press the
button again.
* The menu selecting mode will be canceled:
– If no operations are done for about 5 seconds.
– When you confirm the selection of a track.
13
Selecting the playback modes
Sound adjustments
1
2
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the
music genre (iEQ: intelligent equalizer).
Select your desired playback mode.
1
2
7
Repeat play
Mode
Playback functions (as on iPod)
ONE RPT : Same as “Repeat One.”
Preset values
BAS*1 MID*2 TRE*3 S.BS*4
Indication (For)
ALL RPT
RPT OFF
: Same as “Repeat All.”
: Cancels.
7
Random play
USER
00
00
00 OFF
(Flat sound)
ROCK
(Rock or disco music)
Mode
Playback functions (as on iPod)
+03 00 +02 ON
+01 00 +03 OFF
+02 +01 +02 OFF
+04 –02 +01 ON
+03 00 +03 OFF
ALBM RND *: Same as “Shuffle Albums.”
CLASSIC
(Classical music)
SONG RND : Same as “Shuffle Songs.”
RND OFF : Cancels.
POPS
(Light music)
* Functions only if you select “ALL” in “ALBUMS” of
the main “MENU.”
HIP HOP
(Funk or rap music)
: Corresponding indicator lights up
on the display
JAZZ
(Jazz music)
To check other information while listening
to an iPod
*1 : Bass; *2 : Mid-range; *3 : Treble; *4 : Super bass
Adjusting the sound
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your
preference.
1
2
14
Indication, [Range]
General settings — PSM
BAS *1 (bass), [–06 to +06]
Adjust the bass.
MID *1 (mid-range), [–06 to +06]
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items
listed in the table that follows.
Adjust the mid-range frequencies sound level.
TRE *1 (treble), [–06 to +06]
1
Adjust the treble.
FAD *2 (fader), [R06 to F06]
Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.
2
Select a PSM item.
BAL (balance), [L06 to R06]
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.
S.BS *1 (super bass), [S.BS ON or S.BS OFF],
[01 to 05, initial: 03]*3
3
Adjust the PSM item selected.
Maintain the richness and fullness of the bass sound
regardless of how low you set the volume.
VOL (volume), [00 to 30 or 50 *4]
Adjust the volume.
4
5
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other PSM
items if necessary.
1
*
When you adjust the bass, mid-range, treble, or super
bass, the adjustment you have made is stored for the
currently selected sound mode (iEQ) including “USER.”
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader
level to “00.”
Range adjustment for super bass is adjustable only
when it is set to “S.BS ON.”
Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See
page 17 for details.)
Finish the procedure.
2
3
4
*
*
*
Continued on the next page
15
Indications
Item
: Initial)
Setting, [reference page]
(
DEMO
Display demonstration
• DEMO ON
:
Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no
operation is done for about 20 seconds, [6].
Cancels.
• DEMO OFF
:
:
CLK DISP *1
Clock display
• ON
Clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power is
turned off.
• OFF
:
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about
5 seconds when the power is turned off, [6].
CLOCK H
Hour adjustment
0 – 23
(1 – 12)
[Initial: 0 (0:00)], [6]
[Initial: 00 (0:00)], [6]
CLOCK M
00 – 59
Minute adjustment
24H/12H
Time display mode
• 24H
• 12H
:
:
See also page 6 for setting.
CLK ADJ *2
• AUTO
The built-in clock is automatically adjusted using the CT (clock
Clock adjustment
time) data in the RDS signal.
Cancels.
• OFF
:
:
AF-REG *2
Alternative frequency/
regionalization reception
• AF
When the currently received signals become weak, the unit
switches to another station (the programme may differ from the
one currently received), [10].
• The AF indicator lights up.
• AF REG
:
:
When the currently received signals become weak, the unit
switches to another station broadcasting the same programme.
• The AF and REG indicators light up.
• OFF
Cancels.
PTY-STBY *2
PTY standby
OFF, PTY
codes
Activates PTY Standby Reception with one of the PTY codes, [9,10].
TA VOL *2
Traffic announcement
volume
VOL 00 – VOL [Initial: VOL 15]
30 or 50 *3
P-SEARCH *2
Programme search
• ON
• OFF
:
:
Activates Programme Search, [10].
Cancels.
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select “OFF” to
save the car’s battery.
Only for FM RDS stations.
Depends on the amplifier gain control.
2
3
*
*
16
Indications
Item
: Initial)
Setting, [reference page]
(
DIMMER
Dimmer
• ON
• OFF
:
:
Activates dimmer.
Cancels.
TEL
• MUTING 1/
MUTING 2
• OFF
:
:
Select either one which mutes the sounds while using a cellular
phone.
Cancels.
Telephone muting
SCROLL *4
Scroll
• ONCE
• AUTO
• OFF
:
:
:
Scrolls the track information once.
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).
Cancels.
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display
regardless of the setting.
AUX ADJ
Auxiliary input level
adjustment
A.ADJ 00
– A.ADJ 05
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase
of the output level when changing the source from external
component connected to the AUX input jack on the control panel.
TAG DISP
Tag display
• TAG ON
• TAG OFF
:
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [12].
Cancels.
AMP GAIN
Amplifier gain control
• LOW PWR
:
VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the
speaker is less than 50 W to prevent damaging the speaker.)
VOL 00 – VOL 50
• HIGH PWR
:
:
IF BAND
Intermediate frequency
band
• AUTO
Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises
between close stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)
Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but sound
quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.
• WIDE
:
4
*
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.
17
More about this unit
External component
operations
Basic operations
Turning on the power
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the
power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.
You can connect an external component to the
AUX (auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.
Turning off the power
• If you turn off the power while listening to a track,
playback starts from where it has been stopped
previously, next time you turn on the power.
General
• If you change the source while listening to a disc or
an iPod, playback stops.
Next time you select “CD” or “IPOD” as the playback
source, playback starts from where it has been
stopped/paused previously.
~
• After ejecting a disc or disconnecting an iPod,
“NO DISC” or “NO IPOD” appears and you cannot
operate some of the buttons. Insert another disc,
reconnect an iPod, or press SRC to select another
playback source.
Ÿ Turn on the connected component and
start playing the source.
! Adjust the volume.
Tuner operations
Storing stations in memory
• During SSM search...
– All previously stored stations are erased and
stations are stored newly.
⁄ Adjust the sound as you want. (See
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).
– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will
be automatically tuned in.
pages 14 and 15.)
• When storing a station manually, the previously
preset station is erased when a new station is stored
in the same preset number.
To check other information while listening
to an external component
AUX IN Ô Clock
FM RDS operations
• Network-Tracking Reception requires two types of
RDS signals—PI (Programme Identification) and AF
(Alternative Frequency) to work correctly. Without
receiving these data correctly, Network-Tracking
Reception will not operate correctly.
18
• If a Traffic Announcement is received by TA Standby
Reception, the volume level automatically changes to
the preset level (TA VOL) if the current level is lower
than the preset level.
• When Alternative Frequency Reception is activated
(with AF selected), Network-Tracking Reception is
also activated automatically. (See page 16.)
• If you want to know more about RDS, visit
<http://www.rds.org.uk>.
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.
– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are written with
“Packet Write” method.
– There are improper recording conditions (missing
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,
warped, etc.).
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular
CDs.
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective seal stuck
to the surface.
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an
ink jet printer.
Using these discs under high temperatures or high
humidities may cause malfunctions or damage to the
unit.
Disc operations
Caution for DualDisc playback
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on
this product may not be recommended.
General
Playing an MP3/WMA disc
• This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs/CD
Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs (Rewritable)
in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3 and WMA formats.
• When a disc is inserted upside down, “PLEASE” and
“EJECT” appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to
eject the disc.
• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are
used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or
WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of
the letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No
other characters can be correctly displayed.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the
conditions below:
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps
– Sampling frequency:
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
• This unit can play back only files of the same type
which are first detected if a disc includes both audio
CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this
unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the
following reasons:
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo,
Joliet, Windows long file name
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder
names vary among the disc format used (includes 4
extension characters—<.mp3> or <.wma>).
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters
– Romeo: up to 128 characters
– Discs are dirty or scratched.
– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens inside
the unit.
– Joliet: up to 64 characters
– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters
Continued on the next page
19
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of 200
folders, and of 8 hierarchies.
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable
bit rate).
• If your iPod software version is older than those
mentioned above, you may not be able to control the
iPod properly. Update your iPod to the latest software
version before using it with this unit.
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed
time display, and do not show the actual elapsed
time. Especially, after performing the search function,
this difference becomes noticeable.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and
voice format.
– WMA files which are not based upon Windows
Media® Audio.
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have the data such as AIFF, ATRAC3,
etc.
– You can check the software version of your iPod
from “About” in the “Setting” menu of the iPod.
– For details about updating your iPod, visit
<http://www.apple.com>.
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod is charged
through this unit.
• While the iPod is connected, all operations from the
iPod are disabled. Perform all operations from this
unit.
• While connecting an iPod with Video:
– No video shows on the iPod’s display or the
external monitor (only the audio part is available).
– It is not possible to browse video files on the
“Video“ menu. (If you connect the iPod during
playback or pausing of a video file, resuming
playback will not work.)
• The search function works but search speed is not
constant.
• iPod shuffle is not controllable.
• You can control the iPod from this unit when “JVC” or
Ejecting a disc
“
” appears on the iPod display.
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,
the disc is automatically inserted again into the
loading slot to protect it from dust. Playback starts
automatically.
• The songs order displayed on the selecting menu of
this unit may differ from the iPod.
• If playback is stopped, select a track from the
selecting menu or press ∞.
• The text information may not be displayed correctly.
– Some characters such as accented letters cannot be
shown correctly on the display.
– Depends on the condition of communication
between the iPod and the unit.
• If the text information includes more than 8
characters, it scrolls on the display. This unit can
display up to 40 characters.
iPod operations
Controllable iPod
Software version
iPod with dock connector
(3rd Generation)
2.3 or later
iPod with Click Wheel
(4th Generation)
3.1 or later
iPod mini
iPod photo
iPod nano
1.4 or later
1.2 or later
1.0 or later
1.0 or later
General settings—PSM
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from
“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the volume level
is set higher than “VOL 30,” the unit automatically
changes the volume level to “VOL 30.”
iPod with Video
(5th Generation)
20
Hierarchical structure of file searching when an iPod is connected
21
To keep discs clean
Maintenance
A dirty disc may not play correctly.
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with
a soft cloth in a straight line from center
to edge.
• Do not use any solvent (for example, conventional
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean
discs.
How to clean the connectors
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.
To play new discs
New discs may have some rough spots
around the inner and outer edges. If
such a disc is used, this unit may reject
the disc.
Connector
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in
the following cases:
• After starting the heater in the car.
Do not use the following discs:
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a
few hours until the moisture evaporates.
Warped disc
Sticker
Sticker residue
How to handle discs
When removing a disc from its
case, press down the center holder
of the case and lift the disc out,
holding it by the edges.
Center holder
Stick-on label
• Always hold the disc by the edges.
Do not touch its recording surface.
Unusual shape
When storing a disc into its case, gently insert the
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface
facing up).
Single CD (8 cm disc)
• Make sure to store discs into the cases after use.
22
Troubleshooting
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
• The unit does not work at all.
Reset the unit (see page 2).
Store stations manually.
Connect the aerial firmly.
Insert the disc correctly.
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.
• Static noise while listening to the radio.
• Disc cannot be played back.
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be
skipped.
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which
you used for recording.
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 11).
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
• Change the disc.
• Check the cords and connections.
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.
• Disc cannot be played back.
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in the
format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2,
Romeo, or Joliet.
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the
file names.
• Noise is generated.
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or
WMA tracks.)
• A longer readout time is required (“CHECK” Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.
keeps flashing on the display).
Continued on the next page
23
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Tracks do not play back in the order you
have intended them to play.
Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.
• Elapsed playing time is not correct.
This sometimes occurs during play. This is caused by how
the tracks are recorded on the disc.
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT” appear alternately
on the display.
Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.
• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.
album name).
This unit can only display letters (upper case), numbers,
and a limited number of symbols.
• The iPod does not turn on or does not
work.
• Check the connecting cable and its connection.
• Update the firmware version.
• Charge the battery.
• The sound is distorted.
Deactivate the equalizer either on the unit or the iPod.
• “NO IPOD” appears on the display.
• Check the connecting cable and its connection.
• Charge the battery.
• Playback stops.
The headphones are disconnected during playback. Turn
off the unit‘s power and turn it on again.
• No sound can be heard when connecting
an iPod nano.
• Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.
• Update the firmware version of the iPod nano.
• “NO FILES” appears on the display.
No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod.
Reconnect the iPod.
• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on the
display.
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.
Check the connecting cable and its connection.
Reset the iPod.
• The iPod’s controls do not work after
disconnecting from this unit.
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
• iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
24
Specifications
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION
Maximum Power Output:
CD PLAYER SECTION
Type:
Compact disc player
Front/Rear:
Continuous Power Output (RMS):
50 W per channel
Signal Detection
System:
Non-contact optical pickup
(semiconductor laser)
Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)
Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
Front/Rear:
19 W per channel into
4 Ω, 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at
no more than 0.8% total
harmonic distortion.
Dynamic Range:
96 dB
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB
Load Impedance:
Tone Control Range:
Bass/Mid-range/
Treble:
Frequency Response:
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)
Wow and Flutter:
Less than measurable limit
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)
12 dB at 60 Hz/1 kHz/
7.5 kHz
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz
Max. Bit Rate:
320 kbps
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:
Max. Bit Rate:
192 kbps
Line-Out Level
Impedance:
Output Impedance:
Other Terminal:
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
GENERAL
Power Requirement:
1 kΩ
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V
(11 V to 16 V allowance)
Negative ground
AUX (auxiliary) input jack,
iPod jack, Steering wheel
remote input
Grounding System:
Allowable Operating 0°C to +40°C
Temperature:
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.)
Installation Size:
Panel Size:
Mass:
TUNER SECTION
Frequency Range:
FM:
AM:
182 mm × 52 mm × 150 mm
187 mm × 58 mm × 13 mm
1.3 kg
(excluding accessories)
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
MW: 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz
LW: 144 kHz to 279 kHz
FM Tuner
Usable Sensitivity:
50 dB Quieting
Sensitivity:
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
Design and specifications are subject to change without
notice.
Alternate Channel
Selectivity (400 kHz):
Frequency Response:
Stereo Separation:
MW Tuner
65 dB
40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
30 dB
Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB
LW Tuner
Sensitivity:
50 μV
25
Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit
Haben Sie PROBLEME mit dem Betrieb?
Bitte setzen Sie Ihr Gerät zurück
Siehe Seite Zurücksetzen des Geräts
Затруднения при эксплуатации?
Пожалуйста, перезагрузите Ваше устройство
Для получения информации о перезагрузке Вашего устройства обратитесь на
соответствующую страницу
Dear Customer,
Уважаемый клиент.
This apparatus is in conformance with the valid European
directives and standards regarding electromagnetic
compatibility and electrical safety.
Данное устройство соответствует действительным
Европейским директивам и стандартам по электромагнитной
совместимости и электрической безопасности.
European representative of Victor Company of Japan, Limited
is:
Представительство компании Victor Company of Japan,
Limited в Европе:
JVC Technology Centre Europe GmbH
Postfach 10 05 52
61145 Friedberg
JVC Technology Centre Europe GmbH
Postfach 10 05 52
61145 Friedberg
Germany
Германия
Sehr geehrter Kunde, sehr geehrte Kundin,
dieses Gerät stimmt mit den gültigen europäischen Richtlinien
und Normen bezüglich elektromagnetischer Verträglichkeit
und elektrischer Sicherheit überein.
Die europäische Vertretung für die Victor Company of Japan,
Limited ist:
JVC Technology Centre Europe GmbH
Postfach 10 05 52
61145 Friedberg
Deutschland
EN, GE, RU
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
0107DTSMDTJEIN
KD-PDR31
Installation/Connection Manual
Einbau/Anschlußanleitung
Руководство по установке/подключению
0107DTSMDTJEIN
EN, GE, RU
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
GET0469-013A
[EY]
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
РУССКИЙ
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground
electrical systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a
voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC IN-CAR
ENTERTAINMENT dealers.
Dieses Gerät ist für einen Betrieb in elektrischen Anlagen mit 12 V
Это устройство разработано для эксплуатации на 12 В
Gleichstrom und (–) Erdung ausgelegt. Verfügt Ihr Fahrzeug nicht постоянного напряжения с минусом на массе. Если Ваш
über diese Anlage, ist ein Spannungsinverter erforderlich, der bei JVC
Autoradiohändler erworben werden kann.
автомобиль не имеет этой системы, требуется инвертор
напряжения, который может быть приобретен у дилера
автомобилнего специалиста JVC.
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЯ
Для предотвращения коротких замыканий мы рекомендуем
Вам отсоединить отрицательный разъем аккумулятора и
осуществить все подключения перед установкой устройства.
• После установки обязательно заземлите данное
устройство на шасси автомобиля.
WARNINGS
WARNUNGEN
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the
battery’s negative terminal and make all electrical connections before
installing the unit.
Zur Vermeidung von Kurzschlüssen empfehlen wir, daß Sie den
negativen Batterieanschluß abtrennen und alle elektrischen Anschlüsse
herstellen, bevor das Gerät eingebaut wird.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after
installation.
• Sicherstellen, daß das Gerät nach dem Einbau a Chassis des
Fahrzeugs geerdet wird.
Примечания:
Notes:
Hinweise:
• Заменяйте предохранитель другим предохранителем
указанного класса. Если предохранитель сгорает слишком
часто, обратитесь к дилеру автомобилнего специалиста JVC.
• Рекомендуется подключать динамики с максимальной
мощностью более 50 Вт (к задней и передней панели
устройства, с полным сопротивлением от 4 Ω до 8 Ω). Если
максимальная мощность динамиков менее 50 Вт, перейдите в
режим “AMP GAIN”, чтобы предотвратить их повреждение (см.
ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 17).
• Для предотвращения короткого замыкания заклейте
НЕИСПОЛЬЗУЕМЫЕ концы изолирующей лентой.
• Радиатор во время использования сильно нагревается.
Старайтесь его не трогать во время удаления устройства.
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows
frequently, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer.
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum
• Die Sicherung mit einer der entsprechenden Nennleistung ersetzen.
Brennt die Sicherung häufig durch, wenden Sie sich an ihren JVC
Autoradiohändler.
power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an • Es wird empfohlen, Lautsprecher mit einer Maximalleistung von
impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W,
change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being
damaged (see page 17 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads
with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it
when removing this unit.
mehr als 50 W anzuschließen (sowohl hinten als auch vorne, mit
einer Impedanz von 4 Ω bis 8 Ω). Wenn die Maximalleistung
weniger als 50 W beträgt, stellen Sie „AMP GAIN“ anders ein, um
Schäden an den Lautsprechern zu vermeiden (siehe Seite 17 der
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG).
• Zur Vermeidung eines Kurzschlusses die Anschlußklemmen
der NICHT VERWENDETEN Leitungen mit Isolierklebeband
umwickeln.
• Das Abstrahlblech wird nach dem Gebrauch sehr heiß. Beim Ausbau
des Geräts darauf achten, das Abstrahlblech nicht zu berühren.
Heat sink
Abstrahlblech
Радиатор
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker VORSICHTSMASSREGELN beim Anschließen
connections: der Stromversorgung und Lautsprecher:
ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЯ по питанию и
подключению громкоговорителей:
• НЕ подключайте провода громкоговорителей к
аккумулятору автомобиля, иначе устройство будет
повреждено.
• ПЕРЕД подключением проводов громкоговорителей
к кабелю питания громкоговорителя проверьте схему
соединений громкоговорителей в Вашем автомобиле.
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the • Die Lautsprecherleitungen des Netzkabels NICHT an der
car battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously damaged.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the
speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.
Autobatterie anschließen, da sonst das Gerät schwer
beschädigt wird.
• VOR dem Anschließen der Lautsprecherleitungen des
Spannunsgversorgungskabels an die Lautsprecher, die
Lautsprecherverdrahtung in Ihrem Auto überprüfen.
Parts list for installation and connection
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, Die folgenden Teile werden zusammen mit diesem Gerät geliefert.
consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer immediately. Falls ein Artikel fehlt, wenden Sie sich sofort an Ihren JVC-
Autoradiohändler.
Teileliste für den Einbau und Anschluß
Список деталей для установки и
подключения
Следующие детали поставлены в комплекте с устройством.
При отсутствии какого-либо элемента немедленно свяжитесь с
дилером автомобильного специалиста JVC.
A / B
C
D
E
Hard case/Control panel
Etui/Schalttafel
Sleeve
Halterung
Муфта
Trim plate
Frontrahmen
Декоративную панель
Power cord
Stromkable
Кабель питания
Жесткий футляр/панель управления
F
G
H
I
Connection cable for iPod
Verbindungskabel für iPod
Соединительный кабель
для iPod
Cable tie
Washer (ø5)
Lock nut (M5)
Sicherungsmutter (M5)
Фиксирующая гайка (M5)
Kabelbinder
Unterlegscheibe (ø5)
Кабельная стяжка
Шайба (њ5)
J
K
L
M
N
Mounting bolt (M5 × 20 mm)
Befestigungsschraube (M5 × 20 mm)
Крепежный болт (M5 × 20 мм)
Rubber cushion
Gummipuffer
Резиновый чехол
Handles
Griffe
Рычаги
Remote controller
Fernbedienung
Диcтaнциoннoго
yпpaвлeния
Battery
Batterie
Бaтapeйкa
1
INSTALLATION
EINBAU
УСТАНОВКА (УСТАНОВКА В
ПРИБОРНУЮ ПАНЕЛЬ)
(IN-DASH MOUNTING)
(IM ARMATURENBRETT)
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have
any questions or require information regarding installation kits,
consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company
supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed • Sind Sie sich über den richtigen Einbau des Geräts nicht sicher, lassen • Если Вы не знаете точно, как следует устанавливать это
by a qualified technician.
Die folgende Abbildung zeigt einen typischen Einbau. Bei irgendwelchen На следующих иллюстрациях показана типовая установка.
Fragen oder wenn Sie Informationen hinsichtlich des Einbausatzes
brauchen, wenden Sie sich an ihren JVC Autoradiohändler oder ein
Unternehmen das diese Einbausätze vertreibt.
Если у Вас есть какие-либо вопросы, касающиеся установки,
обратитесь к Вашему дилеру автомобилнего специалиста JVC или
в компанию, поставляющую соответствующие принадлежности.
Sie es von einem qualifizierten Techniker einbauen.
устройство, обратитесь к квалифицированному специалисту.
Do the required electrical connections.
Nehmen Sie die erforderlichen elektrischen
Anschlüsse vor.
Выполните необходимые подключения
контактов, как показано на оборотной
стороне этой инструкции.
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the
sleeve firmly in place.
Die geeigneten Zapfen biegen, um die
Manschette sicher festzuhalten.
Отогните соответствующие
фиксаторы, предназначенные для
прочной установки корпуса.
Removing the unit
Ausbau des Geräts
Удаление устройства
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.
Vor dem Ausbau des Geräts den hinteren Teil freigeben.
Перед удалением устройства освободите заднюю часть.
Insert the two handles, then pull them as illustrated
so that the unit can be removed.
Die beiden Handgriffe einsetzen und dann ziehen wie
in der Abbildung gezeigt, so daß das Gerät entfernt
werden kann.
Вставьте два рычажка, затем потяните их, как
показано на рисунке, чтобы вынуть устройство.
When using the optional stay / Beim Verwenden
der Anker-Option / При использовании
дополнительной стойки
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Beim Einbau des Geräts ohne
Halterung / При установке устройства без использования муфты
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
Zum Beispiel in einem Toyota zuerst das Autoradio ausbauen und dann das Gerät an seinem Platz einbauen.
В автомобиле Тойота, например, сначала извлеките автомобильный радиоприемник и установите устройство на место.
Stay (option)
Anker (Option)
Стойка (дополнительно)
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Senkkopfschrauben (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Крепежные винты (M5 × 8 мм)*2
Fire wall
Feuerwand
Стена
Bracket*2
Konsole*2
Кронштейн*2
Dashboard
Armaturenbrett
Приборная панель
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Senkkopfschrauben (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Крепежные винты (M5 × 8 мм)*2
Pocket
Screw (option)
Schraube (Option)
Винт (дополнительно)
Taschen
Карман
Bracket*2
Konsole*2
Кронштейн*2
Note
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are
used, they could damage the unit.
: Beim Anbringen des Gerät an der Konsole sicherstellen, daß 8 mm lange Schrauben verwendet werden. Werden
längere Schrauben verwendet, können sie das Gerät beschädigen.
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.
Stellen Sie das Gerät mit einem Winkel von
weniger als 30˚ auf.
Hinweis
Примечание : При установке устройства на крепежный кронштейн, используйте только винты длиной 8 мм. При
Установите устройство под углом менее 30°.
использовании более длинных винтов можно повредить устройство.
1
2
1
2
1
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.
Not supplied for this unit.
*
*
Beim Aufstellen des Geräts darauf achten, daß die Sicherung auf der
Rückseite nicht beschädigt wird.
Wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert.
*
Устанавливайте устройство таким образом, чтобы не повредить
предохранитель, расположенный сзади.
Hе входит в комплект поставки.
2
*
2
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
РУССКИЙ
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
ELEKTRISCHE ANSCHLÜSSE
ЭЛЕКТРИЧЕСКИЕ ПОДКЛЮЧЕНИЯ
If your car is equipped with the ISO
For some VW/Audi or Opel (Vauxhall) automobile / Bei bestimmten VW-/Audi- order Opel-
A
connector / Wenn Ihr Fahrzeug mit dem
ISO-Steckverbinder ausgestattet ist / Если
(Vauxhall-) Fahrzeugen / Для некоторых автомобилей VW/Audi или Opel (Vauxhall)
You may need to modify the wiring of the supplied power cord as illustrated.
• Contact your authorized car dealer before installing this unit.
автомобиль оснащен разъемом ISO
Es kann erforderlich sein, die Verdrahtung des mitgelieferten Stromkabels zu modifizieren, wie in der Abbildung gezeigt.
• Wenden Sie sich vor dem Einbau dieses Receivers an Ihre Auto-Fachwerkstatt.
• Connect the ISO connectors as illustrated.
Возможно, потребуется изменить схему соединений для прилагаемого шнура питания, как показано на рисунке.
• Перед установкой приемника обратитесь к авторизованному агенту по продажам автомобильных систем.
• Schließen Sie die ISO-Steckverbinder an, wie in der Abbildung gezeigt.
• Подключите разъемы ISO, как показано на рисунке.
Original wiring / Original verdrahtung /
Исходная схема соединений
Modified wiring 1 / Modifizierte Verdrahtung 1 /
Преобразованная схема соединений 1
From the car body
Von der Fahrzeugkarosserie
От корпуса автомобиля
A
C
B
D
E
F
G
H
ISO connector
ISO-Steckverbinder
Разъем ISO
Use modified wiring
Verwenden Sie die modifizierte Verdrahtung
Если приемник не включается, используйте преобразованную схему
соединений
2
if the unit does not turn on.
2
wenn der Receiver nicht einschaltet.
ISO connector of the supplied power cord
ISO-Stecker des mitgelieferten Stromkabels
Разъем ISO шнура питания, входящего в
комплект поставки
I
J
L
2.
K
M
O
Modified wiring 2 / Modifizierte Verdrahtung 2 /
Преобразованная схема соединений 2
N
P
Y: Yellow
Gelb
Желтый
R: Red
View from the lead side
Von der Kabelseite aus gesehen
Вид со стороны выводов
R
ot
Красный
Connections without using the ISO connectors / Anschlüsse ohne Verwendung der ISO-Steckverbinder / Подключение без использования
разъемов ISO
B
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully.
Vor dem Anschließen: Die Verdrahtung im Fahrzeug sorgfältig
überprüfen. Falsche Anschlüsse können ernsthafte Schäden am Gerät
hervorrufen.
Перед началом подключений: Тщательно проверьте
проводку в автомобиле. Неправильное подключение может
привести к серьезному повреждению устройства.
Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car
body may be different in color.
Die Leiter des Stromkabels und die Leiter des Anschlusses im Fahrzeug Жилы силового кабеля и жилы соединителя от кузова
können sich farblich unterscheiden.
автомобиля могут быть разного цвета.
1 Cut the ISO connector.
1 Schneiden Sie den ISO-Steckverbinder auf.
1 Обрежьте разъем ISO.
2 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order
2 Die farbigen Adern des Stromkabels in der Reihenfolge anschließen, 2 Подсоедините цветные провода шнура питания в
specified in the illustration below.
wie in der Abbildung unten gezeigt.
3 Das Antennenkabel anschließen.
4 Die Kabelbäume am Gerät anschließen.
указанном ниже порядке.
3 Connect the aerial cord.
4 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.
3 Подключите кабель антенны.
4 В последнюю очередь подключите электропроводку к
устройству.
To steering wheel remote controller (see diagram
)
An Lenkradfernbedienung (siehe Schaltplan
)
К рулевому пульту дистанционного управления (см. схему
)
Loop (see diagram
)
Schleife (siehe Schaltplan
)
Петля (см. схему
)
Rear ground terminal
Hintere Erdungsc-
anschlußklemme
Задний разъем
заземления
15 A fuse
15 A Sicherung
Предохранитель 15 A
Aerial terminal
Antennen-
anschlußklemme
Разъем антенны
iPod jack (see diagram
)
iPod-Buchse
(siehe Schaltplan
)
Ignition switch
Zündschalter
Переключатель зажигания
Black
Schwarz
Черный
Разъем iPod (см. схему
)
To metallic body or chassis of the car
Zur metallenen Karosserie oder zum Fahrwerk des Autos
К металлическому корпусу или шасси автомобиля
Line out (see diagram
Schutz kappen Signalausgang
(siehe Schaltplan
К выходу (см. схему
)
Yellow*2
Gelb*2
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing
the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
Zur einer stromführenden Anschlußklemme im Sicherungsblock zum
Anschließen an die Autobatterie (Umgehen des Zündschalters) (konstant 12 V)
К разъему фазы в блоке предохранителя (минуя блок зажигания)
(постоянный 12 В)
)
Желтый*2
)
Red
Rot
Красный
Fuse block
Sicherungsblock
Блок предохранителя
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
Zur einer Zubehöranschlußklemme im Sicherungsblock
К вспомогательному разъему в блоке предохранителя
Blue with white stripe
Blau mit weißem Streifen
Синий с белой полосой
To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any (200 mA max.)
Zum Zusatzkabel des anderen Geräts oder der Motorantenne, sofern vorhanden (max. 200 mA)
К удаленному проводу другого оборудования или антенны (макс. 200 мА)
Brown
Braun
Коричневый
To cellular phone system
An Mobiltelefonsystem
К системе сотового телефона
White with black stripe
Weiß mit schwarzem Streifen
Белый с черной полосой
White
Gray with black stripe
Gray
Green with black stripe
Green
Purple with black stripe
Lila mit schwarzem Streifen
Пурпурный с черной
полосой
Purple
Weiß
Grau mit schwarzem Streifen
Grau
Grün mit schwarzem Streifen
Grün
Lila
Белый Серый с черной полосой
Серый
Зеленый с черной полосой
Зеленый
Пурпурный
Left speaker (front)
Right speaker (front)
Rechter Lautsprecher (vorne)
Правый громкоговоритель
(передний)
Left speaker (rear)
Right speaker (rear)
Rechter Lautsprecher (hinten)
Правый громкоговоритель
(задний)
Linker Lautsprecher (vorne)
Левый громкоговоритель
(передний)
Linker Lautsprecher (hinten)
Левый громкоговоритель
(задний)
1
1
1
*
Not supplied for this unit.
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this
lead must be connected, otherwise power cannot be turned on.
*
Wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert.
*
Не входит в комплект поставки.
Перед проверкой работы устройства подключите этот провод,
иначе питание не включится.
2
2
2
*
*
Vor der Überprüfung der Funktionsfähigkeit des Geräts vor dem
Einbau, muß diese Leitung angeschlossen werden, da sonst die
Stromversorgung nicht eingeschaltet werden kann.
*
3
Connecting the external amplifier / Anschließen des externen Verstärkers / Подключение внешнего усилителя
C
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.
Sie können einen Verstärker anschließen, um Ihre Autostereoanlage zu
erweitern.
• Schließen Sie das Fernbedienungskabel (blau mit weißem Streifen) an
das Fernbedienungskabel des anderen Geräts an, so daß es über dieses
Gerät gesteuert werden kann.
• Die Lautsprecher von diesem Gerät abtrennen und am
Verstärker anschließen. Die Lautsprecherleitungen dieses
Geräts unbenutzt lassen.
Можно подключить усилитель для обновления автомобильной
стереосистемы.
• Подсоедините провод внешнего устройства (синий с
белой полосой) к проводу внешнего устройства другого
оборудования так, чтобы им можно было управлять с этого
устройства.
• Отсоедините громкоговорители от данного
устройства, подключите их к усилителю. Оставьте
провода громкоговорителей данного устройства
неиспользованными.
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote
lead of the other equipment so that it can be controlled through
this unit.
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the
amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of this unit unused.
Remote lead
Fernbedienungsleitung
Провод внешнего устройства
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
Y-Anschluß (wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert)
Разъем Y (не входит в комплект поставки)
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)
Fernbedienungsleitung (blau mit weißem Streifen)
Провод внешнего устройства (cиний с белой полосой)
Rear speakers
Hintere Lautsprecher
Задние
To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any
Zum Zusatzkabel des anderen Geräts oder der Motorantenne,
sofern vorhanden
громкоговорители
JVC Amplifier
JVC Verstärker
JVC-усилитель
К удаленному проводу другого оборудования или антенны
Rear speakers
Hintere Lautsprecher
Задние громкоговорители
Front speakers (see diagram
)
Vordere Lautsprecher (siehe Schaltplan
)
Передние громкоговорители (см. схему
)
Connecting to the steering wheel remote controller / Anschluß an die Lenkradfernbedienung / Подключение к рулевому пульту
D
дистанционного управления
OE remote adapter (not supplied)
Steering wheel remote input
If your car is equipped with the steering wheel remote controller, you can operate this unit using the
controller. To do it, a JVC’s OE remote adapter (not supplied) which matches with your car is required.
Consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer for details.
Radio-Lenkrad-Fernbedienungsadaption (nicht mitgeliefert)
Aдаптер рулевого пульта дистанционного управления
OE (не поставляется)
Eingang für Lenkradfernbedienung
Вход рулевого пульта
дистанционного управления
Wenn Ihr Fahrzeug mit einer Lenkradferndienung ausgestattet ist, können Sie damit diesen Receiver
steuern. Hierfür ist ein für Ihr Fahrzeug passender Radio-Lenkrad-Fernbedienungsadaption von JVC (nicht
mitgeliefert) erforderlich. Für weitere Einzelheiten wenden Sie sich an Ihren JVC Autoradiohändler.
Если автомобиль оборудован рулевым пультом дистанционного управления, его можно
использовать для управления данным устройством. Для этого необходим адаптер рулевого
пульта дистанционного управления JVC OE (не поставляется), подходящий для Вашего
автомобиля. За более подробной информацией обратитесь к поставщику автомобильных
аудиосистем компании JVC.
Steering wheel remote controller (equipped in the car)
Lenkradfernbedienung (im Fahrzeug installiert)
Рулевой пульт дистанционного управления
(устанавливаемый в автомобиле)
Connecting an Apple iPod / Anschließen eines Apple iPod / Подключение проигрывателя Apple iPod
E
Apple iPod (separately purchased)
You can connect an iPod to this unit using the supplied connection cable for iPod.
1 Insert the supplied cable tie across the loop.
Apple iPod (getrennt gekauft)
Cable tie
Apple iPod (продается отдельно)
Kabelbinder
Кабельная стяжка
2 Press in the head of the connection cable for iPod until you hear a clicking sound.
3 Fasten the connection cable using the cable tie to firmly hold the connection cable in place.
Sie können einen Apple iPodan dieses Gerät durch Verwendung des mitgelieferten Verbindungskabels für iPod
anschließen.
1 Führen Sie den mitgelieferten Kabelbinder über die Schleife.
2 Drücken Sie den Kopf des Anschlusskabels für den iPod ein, bis Sie ein Klickgeräusch hören.
3 Befestigen Sie das Verbindungskabel mit dem mitgelieferten Kabelbinder, um das Verbindungskabel fest zu sichern.
Проигрыватель iPod можно подключить к устройству с помощью соединительного кабеля для iPod.
1 Вставьте прилагаемый шнурок соединительного кабеля в петлю.
2 Нажимайте на наконечник соединительного кабеля для iPod до тех пор, пока не услышите звук щелчка.
3 Прикрепите соединительный кабель с помощью шнурка кабеля для надежного крепления кабеля на
Connection cable for iPod
(supplied)
Verbindungskabel für iPod
(mitgeliefert)
Соединительный кабель
для iPod (входит в
комплект поставки)
месте.
Loop
Schleife
Петля
iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
iPod ist ein Warenzeichen von Apple Computer, Inc., eingetragen in den USA und anderen Ländern.
iPod является торговой маркой Apple Computer, Inc., зарегистрированной в США и других странах.
3
3
3
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of
the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove
the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage
to the unit.
*
Verbinden Sie den Erdungsleiter mit der Karosserie oder dem Rahmen
*
Плотно прикрепите заземляющий провод к металлическому
кузову или шасси автомобиля—в месте, не покрытом краской
(если оно покрыто краской, удалите краску перед тем, как
прикреплять провод). Невыполнение этого требования может
привести к повреждению данного устройства.
des Fahrzeugs. Die Kontaktstelle darf nicht lackiert sein (sollte die
Kontaktstelle lackiert sein, entfernen Sie den Lack der Kontaktstelle, bevor
Sie den Leiter befestigen). Wenn der Erdungsleiter nicht ordnungsgemäß
angeschlossen wird, kann dieses Gerät beschädigt werden.
4
5
*
*
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
4
5
4
5
Cut the rear speaker leads of the car’s ISO connector and connect them
to the amplifier.
*
*
Einzelleitung (wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert)
Schneiden Sie die hinteren Lautsprecherkabel des ISO-Steckverbinders des
Fahrzeugs ab, und schließen diese an den Verstärker an.
*
*
Кабель сигнала (не входит в комплект поставки)
Отрежьте провода задних громкоговорителей разъема ISO и
подсоедините их к усилителю.
BЫЯВЛЕНИЕ НЕИСПРАВНОСТЕЙ
TROUBLESHOOTING
FEHLERSUCHE
• Сработал предохранитель.
* Правильно ли подключены черный и красный провода?
• The fuse blows.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?
• Die Sicherung brennt durch.
* Sind die roten und schwarzen Leitungen richtig angeschlossen?
• Питание не включается.
* Подключен ли желтый провод?
• Power cannot be turned on.
* Is the yellow lead connected?
• Stromversorgung kann nicht eingeschaltet werden.
* Ist die gelbe Leitung angeschlossen?
• Звук не выводится через громкоговорители.
* Нет ли короткого замыкания на кабеле выхода
громкоговорителей?
• No sound from the speakers.
• Kein Ton aus den Lautsprechern.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
*
Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung kurzgeschlossen?
• Sound is distorted.
• Ton verzerrt.
• Звук искажен.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung geerdet?
* Sind die „–“ Anschlußklemmen der linken und rechten Lautsprecher
zusammen geerdet?
* Заземлен ли провод выхода громкоговорителей?
* Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и левого (L)
громкоговорителей?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• Noise interfere with sounds.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using
• Störgeräusche im Klang.
• Шум мешает звучанию.
* Соединен ли находящийся сзади зажим заземления с шасси
автомобиля с помощью более короткого и тонкого шнуров?
shorter and thicker cords?
* Ist die hintere Erdungsklemme mit kürzeren und dickeren Kabeln an
das Fahrzeugchassis angeschlossen?
• This unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
• Gerät wird heiß.
• Устройство нагревается.
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
* Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung geerdet?
* Sind die „–“ Anschlußklemmen der linken und rechten Lautsprecher
zusammen geerdet?
* Заземлен ли провод выхода громкоговорителей?
* Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и левого (L)
громкоговорителей?
• This unit does not work at all.
* Have you reset your unit?
• Dieser Receiver funktioniert überhaupt nicht.
* Haben Sie einen Reset am Receiver vorgenommen?
• Приемник не работает.
* Выполнена ли перенастройка приемника?
4
CD RECEIVER
KD-PDR35
KD-PDR35
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.
INSTRUCTIONS
GET0468-001A
[U/UH]
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best
possible performance from the unit.
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical
instruments.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.
How to reset your unit
[European Union only]
Warning:
•
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be
sure to look ahead carefully or you may be involved
in a traffic accident.
How to forcibly eject a disc
Caution on volume setting:
•
•
Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.
If this does not work, reset your unit.
Discs produce very little noise compared with other
sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc
to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden
increase of the output level.
2
How to use the M MODE button
CONTENTS
If you press M MODE, the unit goes into functions mode,
then the number buttons and 5/∞ buttons work as
different function buttons.
Control panel ..................................
Remote controller — RM-RK50...........
4
5
Ex.: When number button 2 works as MO (monaural)
button.
Getting started................................
Basic operations...................................................
6
6
Radio operations .............................
7
Disc operations................................
Playing a disc in the unit .....................................
8
8
To use these buttons for their original functions
again after pressing M MODE, wait for 5 seconds
without pressing any of these buttons until the
functions mode is cleared or press M MODE again.
iPod operations ............................... 11
Sound adjustments.......................... 13
General settings — PSM .................. 14
External component operations ....... 16
Maintenance ................................... 16
More about this unit ........................ 17
Troubleshooting.............................. 21
Specifications.................................. 23
Detaching the control panel
For safety...
Attaching the control panel
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any complicated
operations.
Temperature inside the car...
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes
normal before operating the unit.
3
Control panel
Parts identification
Display window
1
Control dial
o
;
a
s
RND (random) button
M MODE button
(control panel release) button
Disc information indicators—
TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)
DISC indicator
Playback mode / item indicators— RND (random),
(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)
Tuner reception indicators—MO (monaural),
ST (stereo)
2 0 (eject) button
3
4
5
Loading slot
EQ (equalizer) button
DISP (display) button
6 4 /¢ buttons
d
f
7
8
9
Display window
(standby/on attenuator) button
AUX (auxiliary) input jack
g
p 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons
q
w
e
r
SEL (select) button
BAND button
SRC (source) button
Remote sensor
DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).
MO (monaural) button
SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button
Number buttons
h
j
k
l
/
z
S.BASS (super bass) indicator
EQ (equalizer) indicator
Tr (track) indicator
Source display / Time countdown indicator
Main display
Sound mode (iEQ: intelligent equalizer)
indicators—JAZZ, ROCK, HIP HOP, CLASSIC, POPS,
USER
t
y
u
i
RPT (repeat) button
4
Main elements and features
Remote controller —
RM-RK50
Installing the lithium coin battery
(CR2025)
CR2025
Aim the remote controller directly at the remote
sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle
in between.
1
(standby/on/attenuator) button
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or
attenuates the sound when the power is on.
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.
Warning:
2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons
• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.
• Changes the preset stations with D ∞.
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA discs.
• While listening to an Apple iPod.
– Pauses or resumes playback with D ∞.
– Enters the main menu with 5 U.
(Now 5 U/D ∞/2 R/F 3 work as the menu
selecting buttons.)*
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or its
equivalent; otherwise, it may explode.
• Do not leave the remote controller in a place
(such as dashboards) exposed to direct sunlight
for a long time; otherwise, it may explode.
• Store the battery in a place where children cannot
reach to avoid risk of accident.
• To prevent the battery from over-heating,
cracking, or starting a fire:
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the
battery, or dispose of it in a fire.
3
VOL – / VOL + buttons
• Adjusts the volume level.
SOUND button
4
• Selects the sound mode (iEQ: intelligent
equalizer).
– Do not leave the battery with other metallic
materials.
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or
similar tools.
5
SOURCE button
• Selects the source.
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when
throwing away or saving it.
* 5 U : Returns to the previous menu.
D ∞ : Confirms the selection.
Continued on the next page
5
6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and
held.
@ Adjust the sound as you want. (See
page 13.)
• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.
• While listening to an iPod (in menu selecting
mode):
– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then, press
D ∞ to confirm the selection.)
To drop the volume in a
moment (ATT)
To restore the sound, press
the button again.
To turn off the power
– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and held.
Getting started
Basic settings
Basic operations
~ Turn on the power.
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages 14 and
15.
1
2
Ÿ
1 Canceling the display demonstrations
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”
2 Setting the clock
Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust the hour.
Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then adjust the
minute.
1
*
You cannot select “CD” as the playback source
if there is no disc in the unit.
“NO IPOD” appears if iPod is not connected.
2
*
3
Finish the procedure.
! For FM/AM tuner
To check the current clock time while the
power is turned off
⁄ Adjust the volume.
Clock time is shown on the display for
about 5 seconds. See also page 14.
VOL 20
Volume level appears.
6
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to
receive
Radio operations
~
Lights up when monaural mode is activated.
Ÿ
MONO
Lights up when receiving an FM stereo
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.
Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same
procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO indicator
goes off.
88.3
! Start searching for a station.
Storing stations in memory
You can preset six stations for each band.
When a station is received, searching stops.
To stop searching, press the same button
again.
FM station automatic presetting—
SSM (Strong-station Sequential
Memory)
1
Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to
store into.
To tune in to a station manually
In step ! above...
1
2
3
M
2
Select a desired station frequency.
SSM
“SSM” flashes, then disappears when automatic
presetting is over.
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are
searched and stored automatically in the FM band.
7
Manual presetting
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset
number 4 of the FM1 band.
Disc operations
Playing a disc in the unit
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the
source or eject the disc.
1
2
FM I 92.5
3
P4
92.5
Preset number flashes for a while.
To stop play and eject the disc
• Press SRC to listen to another
playback source.
Listening to a preset station
1
2
To fast-forward or reverse the track
To go to the next or previous tracks
Select the preset station (1 – 6) you want.
or
To go to the next or previous folders (only for
MP3 or WMA discs)
To check other information while listening
to the radio
Clock Ô Frequency
8
To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder
(for MP3 or WMA discs) directly
Other main functions
To select a number from 01 – 06:
Skipping tracks quickly during play
• For MP3 or WMA discs, you can skip tracks within the
same folder.
To select a number from 07 – 12:
Ex.: To select track 32 while playing a track whose
number is a single digit (1 to 9)
1
2
• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA discs, it
is required that folders are assigned with 2-digit
numbers at the beginning of their folder names—
01, 02, 03, and so on.
Each time you press the button, you can skip 10
tracks.
To select a particular track in a folder
(for MP3 or WMA discs):
• After the last track, the first track will be selected
and vice versa.
3
Prohibiting disc ejection
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.
NO EJECT
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same
procedure.
9
Changing the display information
While playing an audio CD or a CD Text
Selecting the playback modes
You can use only one of the following playback modes
at a time.
1
2
Select your desired playback mode.
Repeat play
7
While playing an MP3 or a WMA track
• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG ON”
(see page 15)
Mode
Plays repeatedly
TRK RPT
: The current track.
FLDR RPT* : All tracks of the current folder.
RPT OFF
: Cancels.
7
Random play
Mode
Plays at random
• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG OFF”
FLDR RND* : All tracks of the current folder,
then tracks of the next folder
and so on.
DISC RND
: All tracks of the current disc.
RND OFF
: Cancels.
: Clock with the current track number
: Elapsed playing time with the current
track number
: Corresponding indicator lights up on
the display
* Only while playing an MP3 or a WMA disc.
: Corresponding indicator lights up
on the display
1
2
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information,
folder name and file name appear. In this case, the
TAG indicator will not light up.
10
Caution:
iPod operations
You can play songs from an Apple iPod through this unit
by connecting it with the supplied connection cable for
iPod.
• Avoid using the iPod if it might hinder your safety
driving.
• Make sure all important data has been backed up
to avoid losing the data.
• Disconnecting the iPod will stop playback. Press SRC
to listen to another playback source.
To pause playback
• For connection, see Installation/Connection Manual
(separate volume).
To resume playback, press the
button again.
• For details, refer also to the manual supplied with
your iPod.
~ Connect an iPod.
To fast-forward or reverse the track
To go to the next or previous tracks
Connection cable for iPod
If an iPod has been connected...
Playback starts automatically from where it has
been paused previously.
Ÿ Adjust the volume.
! Adjust the sound as you want. (See
page 13.)
11
Selecting a track from the menu
Selecting the playback modes
1
2
Enter the main menu.
1
2
Select your desired playback mode.
7
Repeat play
Now the 5/∞/4 /¢ buttons work as
the menu selecting buttons*.
Mode
Playback functions (as on iPod)
Select the desired menu.
ONE RPT : Same as “Repeat One.”
ALL RPT
RPT OFF
: Same as “Repeat All.”
: Cancels.
7
Random play
PLAYLIST Ô ARTISTS Ô ALBUMS Ô
SONGS Ô GENRES Ô COMPOSER Ô
(back to the beginning)
Mode
Playback functions (as on iPod)
ALBM RND *: Same as “Shuffle Albums.”
SONG RND : Same as “Shuffle Songs.”
RND OFF : Cancels.
3
Confirm the selection.
To move back to the previous
* Functions only if you select “ALL” in “ALBUMS” of
menu, press 5.
the main “MENU.”
: Corresponding indicator lights up
on the display
• If a track is selected, playback starts
automatically.
• If the selected item has another layer, you will
enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the
desired track is played (see page 20).
• Holding 4 /¢ can skip 10 items at
a time.
To check other information while listening
to an iPod
* The menu selecting mode will be canceled:
– If no operations are done for about 5 seconds.
– When you confirm the selection of a track.
12
Indication, [Range]
BAS*2 (bass), [–06 to +06]
Sound adjustments
Adjust the bass.
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the
music genre (iEQ: intelligent equalizer).
MID*2 (mid-range), [–06 to +06]
Adjust the mid-range frequencies sound level.
TRE*2 (treble), [–06 to +06]
Adjust the treble.
FAD*3 (fader), [R06 to F06]
Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.
Preset values
BAS*1 MID*2 TRE*3 S.BS*4
BAL*4 (balance), [L06 to R06]
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.
S.BS*2 (super bass), [S.BS ON or S.BS OFF],
[01 to 05, initial: 03]*5
Maintain the richness and fullness of the bass sound
regardless of how low you set the volume.
Indication (For)
USER
(Flat sound)
00
00
00
00
00 OFF
+02 ON
+03 OFF
ROCK
(Rock or disco music)
+03
+01
SUB.W*1 (subwoofer), [00 to 08, initial: 04]
Adjust the subwoofer output level.
CLASSIC
(Classical music)
VOL (volume), [00 to 30 or 50*6]
Adjust the volume.
POPS
(Light music)
+02 +01 +02 OFF
+04 –02 +01 ON
1
*
Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “WOOFER”
(see page 15).
HIP HOP
(Funk or rap music)
2
*
When you adjust the bass, mid-range, treble, or super
bass, the adjustment you have made is stored for the
currently selected sound mode (iEQ) including “USER.”
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader
level to “00.”
This adjustment will not affect the subwoofer output.
Range adjustment for super bass is adjustable only
when it is set to “S.BS ON.“
JAZZ
(Jazz music)
+03
00
+03 OFF
3
*
*1 : Bass; *2 : Mid-range; *3 : Treble; *4 : Super bass
4
5
*
*
Adjusting the sound
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your
preference.
6
*
Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See
page 15 for details.)
1
2
13
General settings — PSM
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items
listed in the table that follows.
3
Adjust the PSM item selected.
1
4
5
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other PSM
items if necessary.
2
Select a PSM item.
Finish the procedure.
Indications
Item
: Initial)
Setting, [reference page]
(
DEMO
• DEMO ON
:
Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no operation
Display
demonstration
is done for about 20 seconds, [6].
Cancels.
• DEMO OFF
• ON
:
:
CLK DISP*1
Clock display
Clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power is
turned off.
• OFF
:
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5 seconds
when the power is turned off, [6].
CLOCK H
Hour adjustment
1 – 12
00 – 59
[Initial: 1 (1:00)], [6].
[Initial: 00 (1:00)], [6].
CLOCK M
Minute adjustment
DIMMER
Dimmer
• ON
• OFF
:
:
Dims the display illumination.
Cancels.
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select “OFF” to
save the car’s battery.
14
Indications
Item
Setting, [reference page]
(
: Initial)
SCROLL*2
Scroll
• ONCE
• AUTO
• OFF
:
:
:
Scrolls the track information once.
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).
Cancels.
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display
regardless of the setting.
L/O MODE
Line output mode
• REAR
:
:
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting the
speakers (through an external amplifier).
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting a
subwoofer (through an external amplifier).
• WOOFER
WOOFER*3
Subwoofer cutoff
frequency
• LOW
• MID
• HIGH
:
:
:
Frequencies lower than 90 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.
Frequencies lower than 135 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.
Frequencies lower than 180 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.
AUX ADJ
A.ADJ 00
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase of the
output level when changing the source from external component
connected to the AUX input jack on the control panel.
Auxiliary input level — A.ADJ 05
adjustment
TAG DISP
Tag display
• TAG ON
• TAG OFF
:
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [10].
Cancels.
AMP GAIN
Amplifier gain
control
• LOW PWR
:
VOL 00 – VOL 30. (Select this if the maximum power of the speaker is
less than 50 W to prevent damaging the speaker.)
VOL 00 – VOL 50.
• HIGH PWR
• AUTO
:
:
IF BAND
Intermediate
frequency band
Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises between
close stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)
Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but sound
quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.
• WIDE
:
2
*
*
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.
Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “WOOFER.”
3
15
Maintenance
External component
operations
You can connect an external component to the AUX
(auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.
How to clean the connectors
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.
Connector
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in
the following cases:
• After starting the heater in the car.
~
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a
few hours until the moisture evaporates.
Ÿ Turn on the connected component and
start playing the source.
! Adjust the volume.
How to handle discs
When removing a disc from its
case, press down the center holder
of the case and lift the disc out,
holding it by the edges.
Center holder
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its
recording surface.
When storing a disc into its case, gently insert the
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface
facing up).
⁄ Adjust the sound as you want. (See
page 13.)
To check other information while listening
to an external component
• Make sure to store discs into the cases after use.
Clock Ô AUX IN
16
To keep discs clean
More about this unit
Basic operations
A dirty disc may not play correctly.
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with
a soft cloth in a straight line from center
to edge.
Turning on the power
• Do not use any solvent (for example, conventional
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean
discs.
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the
power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.
Turning off the power
• If you turn off the power while listening to a track,
playback starts from where playback it has been
stopped previously, next time you turn on the power.
To play new discs
New discs may have some rough spots
around the inner and outer edges. If
such a disc is used, this unit may reject
the disc.
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.
General
• If you change the source while listening to a disc or
an iPod, playback stops.
Next time you select “CD” or “IPOD” as the playback
source, playback starts from where it has been
stopped/paused previously.
• After ejecting a disc or disconnecting an iPod,
“NO DISC” or “NO IPOD” appears and you cannot
operate some of the buttons. Insert another disc,
reconnect an iPod, or press SRC to select another
playback source.
Do not use the following discs:
Warped disc
Sticker
Sticker residue
Tuner operations
Storing stations in memory
Stick-on label
• During SSM search...
– All previously stored stations are erased and
stations are stored newly.
Unusual shape
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).
– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will
be automatically tuned in.
Single CD (8 cm disc)
• When storing a station manually, the previously
preset station is erased when a new station is stored
in the same preset number.
Continued on the next page
17
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective seal stuck
to the surface.
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an
ink jet printer.
Using these discs under high temperatures or high
humidities may cause malfunctions or damage to the
unit.
Disc operations
Caution for DualDisc playback
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on
this product may not be recommended.
General
• This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs/CD
Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs (Rewritable)
in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3 and WMA formats.
• When a disc is inserted upside down, “PLEASE” and
“EJECT” appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to
eject the disc.
• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are
used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or
WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.
Playing an MP3/WMA disc
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of
the letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No
other characters can be correctly displayed.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the
conditions below:
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps
– Sampling frequency:
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
• This unit can play back only files of the same type
which are first detected if a disc includes both audio
CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this
unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the
following reasons:
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Romeo,
Joliet, Windows long file name
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder
names vary among the disc format used (includes 4
extension characters—<.mp3> or <.wma>).
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters
– Romeo: up to 128 characters
– Discs are dirty or scratched.
– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens inside
the unit.
– Joliet: up to 64 characters
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.
– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are written with
“Packet Write” method.
– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of 200
folders, and of 8 hierarchies.
– There are improper recording conditions (missing
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,
warped, etc.).
CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular CDs.
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable
bit rate).
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed
time display, and do not show the actual elapsed
time. Especially, after performing the search function,
this difference becomes noticeable.
•
18
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and
voice format.
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod is charged
through this unit.
• While the iPod is connected, all operations from the
iPod are disabled. Perform all operations from this
unit.
• While connecting an iPod with Video:
– No video shows on the iPod’s display or the
external monitor (only the audio part is available).
– It is not possible to browse video files on the
“Video“ menu. (If you connect the iPod during
playback or pausing of a video file, resuming
playback will not work.)
– WMA files which are not based upon Windows
Media Audio.
®
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have the data such as AIFF, ATRAC3, etc.
• The search function works but search speed is not
constant.
• iPod shuffle is not controllable.
• You can control the iPod from this unit when “JVC” or
Ejecting a disc
“
” appears on the iPod display.
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,
the disc is automatically inserted again into the
loading slot to protect it from dust. Playback starts
automatically.
• The songs order displayed on the selecting menu of
this unit may differ from the iPod.
• If playback is stopped, select a track from the
selecting menu or press ∞.
• The text information may not be displayed correctly.
– Some characters such as accented letters cannot be
shown correctly on the display.
– Depends on the condition of communication
between the iPod and the unit.
• If the text information includes more than 8
characters, it scrolls on the display.
This unit can display up to 40 characters.
iPod operations
Controllable iPod
Software version
iPod with dock connector
(3rd Generation)
2.3 or later
iPod with Click Wheel
(4th Generation)
3.1 or later
iPod mini
iPod photo
iPod nano
1.4 or later
1.2 or later
1.0 or later
1.0 or later
General settings—PSM
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from
“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the volume level
is set higher than “VOL 30,” the unit automatically
changes the volume level to “VOL 30.”
iPod with Video
(5th Generation)
• If your iPod software version is older than those
mentioned above, you may not be able to control the
iPod properly. Update your iPod to the latest software
version before using it with this unit.
– You can check the software version of your iPod
from “About” in the “Setting” menu of the iPod.
– For details about updating your iPod, visit
<http://www.apple.com>.
19
Hierarchical structure of file searching when an iPod is connected
20
Troubleshooting
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers.
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
• The unit does not work at all.
Reset the unit (see page 2).
Store stations manually.
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.
• Static noise while listening to the radio.
• Disc cannot be played back.
Connect the antenna firmly.
Insert the disc correctly.
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be skipped. • Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which
you used for recording.
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 9).
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
• Change the disc.
• Check the cords and connections.
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.
• Disc cannot be played back.
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in the
format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2,
Romeo, or Joliet.
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the
file names.
• Noise is generated.
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or
WMA tracks.)
• A longer readout time is required (“CHECK”
keeps flashing on the display).
Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.
Continued on the next page
21
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Tracks do not play back in the order you have Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.
intended them to play.
•
Elapsed
playing
time
is
not
correct.This
the tracks are recorded on the disc.
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT“ appear alternately on Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.
the display.
• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.
album name).
This unit can only display letters (upper case), numbers,
and a limited number of symbols.
•
The iPod does not turn on or does not work.•
• Update the firmware version.
Check the connect
•
Charge the battery.
•
•
The
sound
is
e and its connecthtieon.
dist
display.•
“NO
IPOD”
Ch
a
e
p
c
p
k
e
t
a
h
r
e
s
connecting cab
oln
• Charge the battery
•
Playback
stops.The
off the unit’s power and turn it on again.
• No sound can be heard when connecting an • Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.
iPod nano.
• Update the firmware version of the iPod nano.
• “NO FILES” appears on the display.
No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod.
•
“RESET 1”
–
“RESET 7” appears on the display.Reconnect the iPod.
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.
Check the connecting cable and its connection
Reset the iPod.
• The iPod’s controls do not work after
disconnecting from this unit.
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
• iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
22
Specifications
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION
CD PLAYER SECTION
Maximum Power Output:
Type:
Compact disc player
Front/Rear:
Continuous Power Output (RMS):
50 W per channel
Signal Detection
System:
Non-contact optical pickup
(semiconductor laser)
Front/Rear:
19 W per channel into 4 Ω,
Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)
Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more
than 0.8% total harmonic
distortion.
Dynamic Range:
96 dB
Signal-to-Noise Ratio 98 dB
Load Impedance:
Tone Control Range:
Bass:
Mid-range:
Treble:
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)
Wow and Flutter:
Less than measurable limit
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)
12 dB at 60 Hz
12 dB at 1 kHz
12 dB at 7.5 kHz
Max. Bit Rate:
320 kbps
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB
Max. Bit Rate:
192 kbps
Line-Out Level/
Impedance:
Subwoofer-Out
Level/Impedance:
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ
Other Terminal:
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
GENERAL
Power Requirement:
2.5 V /20 kΩ load (full scale)
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V
(11 V to 16 V allowance)
Negative ground
Grounding System:
AUX (auxiliary) input jack,
iPod jack
Allowable Operating 0°C to +40°C
Temperature:
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.)
TUNER SECTION
Frequency Range:
FM:
Installation Size:
Panel Size:
182 mm × 52 mm × 150 mm
187 mm × 58 mm × 13 mm
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHZ
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz
Mass:
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)
AM:
FM Tuner
Usable Sensitivity:
50 dB Quieting
Sensitivity:
Design and specifications are subject to change without
notice.
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
Alternate Channel
65 dB
Selectivity (400 kHz):
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
Stereo Separation:
30 dB
AM Tuner
Sensitivity:
Selectivity:
20 μV
35 dB
23
Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit
EN, TH
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
1206DTSMDTJEIN
KD-PDR35
Installation/Connection Manual
°“√µ¥µß/§¡Õ°“√µ¥µß
1206DTSMDTJEIN
EN, TH
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
GET0468-006A
[U/UH]
‰∑¬
ENGLISH
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.
™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π‰¥√∫°“√ÕÕ°·∫∫¡“‡æÕ„™ß“π°∫√–∫∫ °√–· ‰øø“ “¬¥π¢«≈∫°√–· µ√ß 12 ‚«≈∑ À“°√∂¬πµ¢Õߧÿ≥‰¡‰
¥„™√–∫∫π µÕß„™‡§√Õß·ª≈ß°√–· ‰ø™«¬ ´ß “¡“√∂À“´Õ‰¥®“°√“π¢“¬‡§√Õ߇ ¬ß√∂¬πµ JVC
§”‡µÕπ
WARNINGS
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all ‡æÕªÕß°π°“√‡°¥‰øø“≈¥«ß®√¢Õ·π–π”„Àª≈¥¢«·∫µ‡µÕ√≈∫ÕÕ°·≈«®ßµÕ “¬‰ø°Õπµ¥µß‡§√Õß
electrical connections before installing the unit.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.
• µ√«® Õ∫„À·π„®«“‰¥‡¥π “¬¥πµÕ√–À«“߇§√Õß°∫µ«∂ß √∂¬πµ„À¡·≈«À≈ß®“°µ¥µß
À¡“¬‡Àµ
ÿ
Notes:
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio
dealer.
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at
the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than
50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 15 of the
INSTRUCTIONS).
• ¢Õ·π–π”„ÀµÕ≈”‚æß ∑¡°”≈ߢ∫ ß
ÿ
∂“°”≈ߢ∫µ”°«“ 50 W „À‡ª≈¬π§“ “AMP GAIN” ‡æÕªÕß°π‰¡„À≈”‚æß™”√
ÿ
• °“√ªÕß°π°“√≈¥«ß®√ ®–µÕßæ㛮 “¬µ–°« ∑‰¡„™·≈«¥«¬‡∑ ªæ𠓬‰ø
• ·ºπ√–∫“¬§«“¡√Õπ®–√Õπ¡“°À≈ß®“°„™ √–¡¥√–«ßÕ¬“‰ª ¡º ‡¡Õ∂Õ¥™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.
Heat sink
·ºπ√–∫“¬§«“¡√Õπ
¢Õ§«√√–«ß ”À√∫°“√µÕ·À≈ß®“¬°”≈ß·≈–≈”‚æß:
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit
• Õ¬“µÕ “¬µ–°«‡§‡∫≈°”≈ߢÕß≈”‚æ߇¢“°∫·∫µ‡µÕ√√∂¬πµ ¡©–ππ ™ÿ
will be seriously damaged.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in
• °Õπ∑®–µÕ “¬µ–°«‡§‡∫≈°”≈ߢÕß≈”‚æ߇¢“°∫≈”‚æß „Àµ√«® Õ∫°“√‡¥π “¬‰ø≈”‚æß„π√∂¢Õߧ
ÿ
your car.
Parts list for installation and connection
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer
immediately.
√“¬°“√ «πª√–°Õ∫ ”À√∫µ¥µß·≈–‡™Õ¡µÕ°π
«πª√–°Õ∫µÕ‰ªπ„À¡“°∫™¥ÿ ª√–°Õ∫π À“°¡ ß„¥‰¡§√∫ °√ÿ≥“ª√°…“µ«·∑π®”À𓬇§√Õ߇ ¬ßµ¥√∂¬πµ JVC ‚¥¬∑π∑
D
E
A / B
C
Trim plate
Power cord
Hard case/Control panel
Sleeve
·ºπ‚≈À–¢Õ∫·µß
“¬‡§‡∫≈°”≈ß
≈ß∫√√®ÿ/À𓪥
ª≈Õ°Àÿ¡
F
H
I
G
C“a¬b√l¥e ti“e¬‰ø
Connection cable for iPod
“¬‡™Õ¡µÕ ”À√∫ iPod
Washer (ø5)
ª√–‡°π«ß·À«π (ø5)
Lock nut (M5)
πÕµ≈Õ§ (M5)
K
R¬“ußb°bπe°r√c–u·s∑hi°on
J
L
H§πa∫ndߧle∫s
M
N
B·∫atµte‡µryÕ√
Mounting bolt (M5 × 20 mm)
Remote controller
√‚¡µ§Õπ‚∑√≈
≈°µ¥ (M5 × 20 ¡¡.)
1
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)
°“√µ¥µß (°“√ª√–°Õ∫·ºßÀπ“ª∑¡‡¢“)
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.
¿“浫լ“ßµÕ‰ªπ· ¥ß∂ß°“√µ¥µß·∫∫∑«‰ª À“°§
¬ß√∂¬πµ JVC ¢Õß∑“πÀ√Õ∫√…
• ™¥ª√–°Õ∫ ∂“§≥‰¡·π„®«“µ¥µß™
ÿ
ÿ
ÿ
ÿ
ÿ
ÿ
Do the required electrical connections.
µÕ “¬‰øµ“¡∑°”À𥉫∑ßÀ¡¥
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the
sleeve firmly in place.
ßÕ·ºπ‡æÕ¬¥ª≈Õ°„ÀµÕ°π‡¢“∑
Removing the unit
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.
°“√∂Õ¥™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫
°Õπ®–∂Õ¥™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫ „Àª≈¥Àπ“µ¥ «π∑“¬°Õπ
Insert the two handles, then pull them as
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.
„ §π∫ߧ∫2 Õπ≈ß„π√Õß ”À√∫„™æπ≈«¥¥ß¿“殓°ππ
„À‡≈Õπ™
ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫ÕÕ°„π¢≥–∑§Õ¬Ê¥ß§π∫ߧ∫∑ß Õß
ÕπÕÕ°®“°°π
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / ‡¡Õµ¥µß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫‚¥¬‰¡„™ª≈Õ°Àÿ¡
When using the optional stay / ‡¡Õ„™µ«¬¥·∫∫‡≈Õ°‰¥
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
Stay (option)
µ«¬¥ (‡≈Õ°‰¥)
µ«Õ¬“߇™π „π√∂¬πµ‚µ‚¬µ“ „À∂Õ¥«∑¬ÿµ¥√∂¬πµÕÕ°°Õπ ·≈«®ßµ¥µß‡§√Õßπ‡¢“·∑π∑
Fire wall
ºπß°π‰ø
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
°√À«‡√¬∫(M5 × 8 ¡¡)*2
D·ºaßshÀbπo“aªr∑d¡
Bracket*2
·∑π√Õß√∫*2
Screw (option)
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
°√À«‡√¬∫(M5 × 8 ¡¡)*2
°√ (‡≈Õ°‰¥)
P°–o‡cªk“e–t
Bracket*2
·∑π√Õß√∫*2
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.
µ¥µß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫∑¡ÿ¡µ”°«“ 30˚ Õß»“
Note
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are
used, they could damage the unit.
À¡“¬‡Àµ
: ‡¡Õµ¥µß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫≈ß„π·∑π√Õß√∫‰« „À„™ °√¬“«¢π“¥ 8 ¡¡. ∂“„™ °√¬“«°«“πÕ“®∑”„À™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫‡ ¬À“¬‰¥
1
2
*1 ‡¡Õ§
*2 ‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™
ÿ≥µß™ÿ
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.
Not supplied for this unit.
ÿ
2
ENGLISH
‰∑¬
°“√‡™Õ¡‚¥¬„™‰øø“
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A
Typical connections / °“√‡™Õ¡µÕ·∫∫ª°µ
°Õ•∑”°“•‡™•Õ¡µÕ: µ•«®†Õ•°“•‡¥•†“¬‰ø„•••¬•µÕ¬“ß•–¡¥•–«Õ¬“„Àº¥æ•“¥„•°“•‡™•Õ¡µÕ™
ÿ
ÿ
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious
damage to this unit.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.
°“•‡™•Õ¡µÕº¥æ•“¥Õ“®∑”„À‡°¥§«“¡‡†¬À“¬•“¬·•ß°•™ÿ¥ª•–
°Õ••‰¥“•µ–°«¢Õ߆“¬‰ø ·•–¢ÕßÕ
ÿ
1 µÕ “¬‰ø µ“¡≈”¥∫∑√–∫
2 ‡™Õ¡µÕ°∫“¬Õ“°“»
ÿ
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.
2 Connect the antenna cord.
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.
3
ÿ¥∑“¬ µÕ «π§«∫§ÿ¡°“√‡¥π “¬‰ø‡¢“°∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫™ÿ¥π
Loop (see diagram
)
À«ß (¥·ºπ¿¡
)
Rear ground terminal
®ÿ¥‡™Õ¡µÕ “¬¥π¥“πÀ≈ß
15 A fuse
ø« ¢π“¥ 15 A
Antenna terminal
iPod jack
(see diagram
¢« “¬Õ“°“»
)
À«‡≈¬∫ iPod
Ignition switch
«∑™®ÿ¥√–‡∫¥
(¥·ºπ¿¡
)
Black
¥”
To metallic body or chassis of the car
µÕ°∫‚§√ß‚≈À–À√Õ‡™ ´ ¢Õß√∂¬πµ
Line out (see diagram
)
“¬ÕÕ° (¥·ºπ¿¡
)
Yellow *2
‡À≈Õß*2
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
µÕ°∫¢«∑¡°√–· ‰øø“„π·ºßø« ´ßµÕ°∫·∫µ‡µÕ√√∂¬πµ
(‚¥¬‰¡µÕß„™ «∑™®ÿ¥√–‡∫¥) (12 ‚«≈∑§ß∑)
Fuse block
·ºßø«
Red
ᴧ
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
µÕ°∫¢« «πª√–°Õ∫„π·ºßø«
Blue
»ø“
To automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)
‡ “Õ“°“»‰øø“Õµ‚π¡µ À“°¡ (¢π“¥ ß ¥ 250 mA)
Blue with white stripe
π”‡ßπ≈“¬¢“«
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)
)
µÕ‡¢“°∫Õª°√≥Õπ (¢π“¥ ß ¥ 200 mA
Gray
Green with black stripe
Purple with black stripe
Purple
White with black stripe
Gray with black stripe
Green
White
‡∑“
‡¢¬«·∂∫¥”
¡«ß·∂∫¥”
¡«ß
¢“«·∂∫¥”
‡∑“·∂∫¥”
‡¢¬«
¢“«
Right speaker (rear)
Right speaker (front)
Left speaker (rear)
Left speaker (front)
≈”‚æߢ«“ (À≈ß)
≈”‚æߢ«“ (Àπ“)
≈”‚æß´“¬ (À≈ß)
≈”‚æß´“¬ (Àπ“)
1
2
*1 ‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™
ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.
*2 °Õπ°“√µ√«® Õ∫°“√∑”ß“π¢Õß™
ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π°Õπ∑®–µ¥µß µÕßµÕ “¬µ–°«π°Õπ¡©–ππ®–‰¡ “¡“√∂‡ª¥‡§√Õ߉¥
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise power
cannot be turned on.
3
Connecting the external amplifier or subwoofer µÕ·Õ¡ª≈ø“¬‡ÕÕ√À√Õ´∫«ø‡øÕ√¥“ππÕ
B
/
§
ÿ
ÿ
You can connect amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it
can be controlled through this unit.
ÿ
ÿ¡‚¥¬™ÿ¥ª√–
°Õ∫π‰¥
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker
leads of this unit unused.
• ∂Õ¥≈”‚æßÕÕ°®“°™
ÿ
ÿ
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
¢ÕµÕ√ªµ« Y (‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π)
Set “L/O MODE” to “REAR” (See page 15 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)
µß§“ “L/O MODE” ‡ªπ “REAR” (¥Àπ“ 15 §”·π–π”)
Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)
“¬µ–°«•–¬–‰°• ( π”‡ßπ≈“¬¢“«)
JVC Amplifier
‡§√Õߢ¬“¬‡ ¬ß JVC
Rear speakers
To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any
≈”‚æßÀ≈ß
µÕ “¬°∫Õÿª°√≥ÕπÀ√Õ‡ “Õ“°“»Õµ‚π¡µ∂“¡
Set “L/O MODE” to “WOOFER” (See page 15 of the
INSTRUCTIONS.)
Front speakers
µß§“ “L/O MODE” ‡ªπ “WOOFER” (¥Àπ“ 15 §”·π–π”)
≈”‚æßÀπ“
or
À√Õ
Subwoofer
´∫«ø‡øÕ√
JVC Amplifier
‡§√Õߢ¬“¬‡ ¬ß JVC
Connecting an Apple iPod °“√‡™Õ¡µÕ°∫ Apple iPod
C
/
Apple iPod (separately purchased)
You can connect an iPod to this unit using the supplied connection cable for iPod.
1 Insert the supplied cable tie across the loop.
Apple iPod (·¬°®”Àπ“¬)
C“a¬b√l¥e ti“e¬‰ø
2 Press in the head of the connection cable for iPod until you hear a clicking sound.
3 Fasten the connection cable using the cable tie to firmly hold the connection cable in
place.
∑“π “¡“√∂µÕ‡§√Õ߇≈π iPod °∫‡§√Õ߇≈ππ‰¥‚¥¬„™ “¬‡§‡∫≈∑¡“°∫‡§√Õß iPod ¬¥ “¬‡§‡∫≈ ”À√
1 Õ¥ “¬√¥ “¬‰ø∑„À¡“‡¢“‰ª„πÀ«ß
2 °¥À«‡ ¬∫ “¬µÕ iPod ≈߉ª®π°√–∑߉¥¬π‡ ¬ß¥ß§≈°
3 „™ “¬√¥ “¬‰ø∑§≈ÕßÕ¬°∫À«ß¬¥ “¬µÕ iPod ‰«„ÀÕ¬°∫∑
Connection cable for iPod (supplied)
“¬‡™Õ¡µÕ ”À√∫ iPod (¡¡“„À)
Loop
À«ß
iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
iPod ‡ªπ‡§√ÕßÀ¡“¬°“√§“¢Õß Apple Computer, Inc. ´ß®¥∑–‡∫¬π°“√§“„πª√–‡∑» À√∞Õ‡¡√°“·≈–ª√–‡∑»ÕπÊ
3
3
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint
(if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the
unit.
Remote lead.
*
µÕ≈«¥ “¬¥π„À·ππ‡¢“°∫µ«∂߇À≈° À√Õµ«∂ß√∂
—
µ√ß «π ∑‰¡¡ ‡§≈Õ∫ (À“°¡ ‡§≈Õ∫Õ¬ „À¢¥ ÕÕ°°Õπ °ÕπµÕ≈«¥ “¬¥π)
À“°‰¡ªØ∫µµ“¡§”·π–π”𠇧√ÕßÕ“®™”√
“¬µ–°«•–¬–‰°•
ÿ¥À√Õ‡ ¬À“¬‰¥
4
*
4
5
*
*
*5 “¬‡§‡∫≈ ≠≠“≥ (‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™
ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π)
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit).
TROUBLESHOOTING
°“√µ√«® Õ∫ª≠À“¢¥¢Õß
• The fuse blows.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?
• ø« ¢“¥
* ¡°“√‡™Õ¡ “¬µ–°« ¥”·≈– ·¥ßÕ¬“ß∂°µÕßÀ√Õ‰¡
• Power cannot be turned on.
* Is the yellow lead connected?
• ‰¡ “¡“√∂‡ª¥‡§√Õ߉¥
* ¡°“√‡™Õ¡ “¬µ–°« ‡À≈ÕßÀ√Õ‰¡
• No sound from the speakers.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
• ‰¡¡‡ ¬ßÕÕ°®“°≈”‚æß
* “¬µ–°« «π∑ÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æ߇°¥‰øø“≈¥«ß®√À√Õ‰¡
• Sound is distorted.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• ‡ ¬ß‡æ¬π
* “¬µ–°« «π∑ÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æßµÕ≈ߥπÀ√Õ‰¡
* “¬¢«≈∫ “–” ¢Õß≈”‚æߥ“π´“¬·≈–¢«“µÕ≈ß¥πµ“¡ª°µÀ√Õ‰¡
• Noise interfere with sounds.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?
• ‡ ¬ß√∫°«π
* ¡°“√„™ “¬ πÊ À√ÕÀπ“Ê µÕ®“°‡§√Õß «π∑µ¥µß ‰«∫πæπ¥“πÀ≈ß°∫µ«∂ß√∂¬πµÀ√Õ‰¡
• This unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• ™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫√Õπ¢π
* “¬µ–°« «π∑ÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æßµÕ≈ߥπÀ√Õ‰¡
* “¬¢«≈∫ “–” ¢Õß≈”‚æߥ“π´“¬·≈–¢«“µÕ≈ß¥πµ“¡ª°µÀ√Õ‰¡
• This unit does not work at all.
* Have you reset your unit?
• ‡§√Õß√∫π∑”ß“π‰¡
* ∑“π‰¥µß‡§√Õß„À¡·≈«À√Õ¬ß
4
CD RECEIVER
KD-PDR35
KD-PDR35
ALAT PENERIMA CD
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.
Untuk membatalkan tampilan demonstrasi, lihat halaman 6.
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.
Untuk instalasi dan penyambungan, lihat buku pedoman terpisah.
INSTRUCTIONS
BUKU PETUNJUK
GET0468-004A
[UN]
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best
possible performance from the unit.
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical
instruments.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.
How to reset your unit
[European Union only]
Warning:
•
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be
sure to look ahead carefully or you may be involved
in a traffic accident.
How to forcibly eject a disc
Caution on volume setting:
•
•
Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.
If this does not work, reset your unit.
Discs produce very little noise compared with other
sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc
to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden
increase of the output level.
2
How to use the M MODE button
CONTENTS
If you press M MODE, the unit goes into functions mode,
then the number buttons and 5/∞ buttons work as
different function buttons.
Control panel ..................................
Remote controller — RM-RK50...........
4
5
Ex.: When number button 2 works as MO (monaural)
button.
Getting started................................
Basic operations...................................................
6
6
Radio operations .............................
7
Disc operations................................
Playing a disc in the unit .....................................
8
8
To use these buttons for their original functions
again after pressing M MODE, wait for 5 seconds
without pressing any of these buttons until the
functions mode is cleared or press M MODE again.
iPod operations ............................... 11
Sound adjustments.......................... 13
General settings — PSM .................. 14
External component operations ....... 16
Maintenance ................................... 16
More about this unit ........................ 17
Troubleshooting.............................. 21
Specifications.................................. 23
Detaching the control panel
For safety...
Attaching the control panel
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any complicated
operations.
Temperature inside the car...
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes
normal before operating the unit.
3
Control panel
Parts identification
Display window
1
Control dial
o
;
a
s
RND (random) button
M MODE button
(control panel release) button
Disc information indicators—
TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)
DISC indicator
Playback mode / item indicators— RND (random),
(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)
Tuner reception indicators—MO (monaural),
ST (stereo)
2 0 (eject) button
3
4
5
Loading slot
EQ (equalizer) button
DISP (display) button
6 4 /¢ buttons
d
f
7
8
9
Display window
(standby/on attenuator) button
AUX (auxiliary) input jack
g
p 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons
q
w
e
r
SEL (select) button
BAND button
SRC (source) button
Remote sensor
DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).
MO (monaural) button
SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button
Number buttons
h
j
k
l
/
z
S.BASS (super bass) indicator
EQ (equalizer) indicator
Tr (track) indicator
Source display / Time countdown indicator
Main display
Sound mode (iEQ: intelligent equalizer)
indicators—JAZZ, ROCK, HIP HOP, CLASSIC, POPS,
USER
t
y
u
i
RPT (repeat) button
4
Main elements and features
Remote controller —
RM-RK50
Installing the lithium coin battery
(CR2025)
CR2025
Aim the remote controller directly at the remote
sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle
in between.
1
(standby/on/attenuator) button
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or
attenuates the sound when the power is on.
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.
Warning:
2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons
• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.
• Changes the preset stations with D ∞.
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA discs.
• While listening to an Apple iPod.
– Pauses or resumes playback with D ∞.
– Enters the main menu with 5 U.
(Now 5 U/D ∞/2 R/F 3 work as the menu
selecting buttons.)*
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or its
equivalent; otherwise, it may explode.
• Do not leave the remote controller in a place
(such as dashboards) exposed to direct sunlight
for a long time; otherwise, it may explode.
• Store the battery in a place where children cannot
reach to avoid risk of accident.
• To prevent the battery from over-heating,
cracking, or starting a fire:
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the
battery, or dispose of it in a fire.
3
VOL – / VOL + buttons
• Adjusts the volume level.
SOUND button
4
• Selects the sound mode (iEQ: intelligent
equalizer).
– Do not leave the battery with other metallic
materials.
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or
similar tools.
5
SOURCE button
• Selects the source.
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when
throwing away or saving it.
* 5 U : Returns to the previous menu.
D ∞ : Confirms the selection.
Continued on the next page
5
6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and
held.
@ Adjust the sound as you want. (See
page 13.)
• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.
• While listening to an iPod (in menu selecting
mode):
– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then, press
D ∞ to confirm the selection.)
To drop the volume in a
moment (ATT)
To restore the sound, press
the button again.
To turn off the power
– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and held.
Getting started
Basic settings
Basic operations
~ Turn on the power.
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages 14 and
15.
1
2
Ÿ
1 Canceling the display demonstrations
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”
2 Setting the clock
Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust the hour.
Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then adjust the
minute.
1
*
You cannot select “CD” as the playback source
if there is no disc in the unit.
“NO IPOD” appears if iPod is not connected.
2
*
3
Finish the procedure.
! For FM/AM tuner
To check the current clock time while the
power is turned off
⁄ Adjust the volume.
Clock time is shown on the display for
about 5 seconds. See also page 14.
VOL 20
Volume level appears.
6
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to
receive
Radio operations
~
Lights up when monaural mode is activated.
Ÿ
MONO
Lights up when receiving an FM stereo
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.
Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same
procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO indicator
goes off.
88.3
! Start searching for a station.
Storing stations in memory
You can preset six stations for each band.
When a station is received, searching stops.
To stop searching, press the same button
again.
FM station automatic presetting—
SSM (Strong-station Sequential
Memory)
1
Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to
store into.
To tune in to a station manually
In step ! above...
1
2
3
M
2
Select a desired station frequency.
SSM
“SSM” flashes, then disappears when automatic
presetting is over.
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are
searched and stored automatically in the FM band.
7
Manual presetting
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset
number 4 of the FM1 band.
Disc operations
Playing a disc in the unit
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the
source or eject the disc.
1
2
FM I 92.5
3
P4
92.5
Preset number flashes for a while.
To stop play and eject the disc
• Press SRC to listen to another
playback source.
Listening to a preset station
1
2
To fast-forward or reverse the track
To go to the next or previous tracks
Select the preset station (1 – 6) you want.
or
To go to the next or previous folders (only for
MP3 or WMA discs)
To check other information while listening
to the radio
Clock Ô Frequency
8
To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder
(for MP3 or WMA discs) directly
Other main functions
To select a number from 01 – 06:
Skipping tracks quickly during play
• For MP3 or WMA discs, you can skip tracks within the
same folder.
To select a number from 07 – 12:
Ex.: To select track 32 while playing a track whose
number is a single digit (1 to 9)
1
2
• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA discs, it
is required that folders are assigned with 2-digit
numbers at the beginning of their folder names—
01, 02, 03, and so on.
Each time you press the button, you can skip 10
tracks.
To select a particular track in a folder
(for MP3 or WMA discs):
• After the last track, the first track will be selected
and vice versa.
3
Prohibiting disc ejection
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.
NO EJECT
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same
procedure.
9
Changing the display information
While playing an audio CD or a CD Text
Selecting the playback modes
You can use only one of the following playback modes
at a time.
1
2
Select your desired playback mode.
Repeat play
7
While playing an MP3 or a WMA track
• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG ON”
(see page 15)
Mode
Plays repeatedly
TRK RPT
: The current track.
FLDR RPT* : All tracks of the current folder.
RPT OFF
: Cancels.
7
Random play
Mode
Plays at random
• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG OFF”
FLDR RND* : All tracks of the current folder,
then tracks of the next folder
and so on.
DISC RND
: All tracks of the current disc.
RND OFF
: Cancels.
: Clock with the current track number
: Elapsed playing time with the current
track number
: Corresponding indicator lights up on
the display
* Only while playing an MP3 or a WMA disc.
: Corresponding indicator lights up
on the display
1
2
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information,
folder name and file name appear. In this case, the
TAG indicator will not light up.
10
Caution:
iPod operations
You can play songs from an Apple iPod through this unit
by connecting it with the supplied connection cable for
iPod.
• Avoid using the iPod if it might hinder your safety
driving.
• Make sure all important data has been backed up
to avoid losing the data.
• Disconnecting the iPod will stop playback. Press SRC
to listen to another playback source.
To pause playback
• For connection, see Installation/Connection Manual
(separate volume).
To resume playback, press the
button again.
• For details, refer also to the manual supplied with
your iPod.
~ Connect an iPod.
To fast-forward or reverse the track
To go to the next or previous tracks
Connection cable for iPod
If an iPod has been connected...
Playback starts automatically from where it has
been paused previously.
Ÿ Adjust the volume.
! Adjust the sound as you want. (See
page 13.)
11
Selecting a track from the menu
Selecting the playback modes
1
2
Enter the main menu.
1
2
Select your desired playback mode.
7
Repeat play
Now the 5/∞/4 /¢ buttons work as
the menu selecting buttons*.
Mode
Playback functions (as on iPod)
Select the desired menu.
ONE RPT : Same as “Repeat One.”
ALL RPT
RPT OFF
: Same as “Repeat All.”
: Cancels.
7
Random play
PLAYLIST Ô ARTISTS Ô ALBUMS Ô
SONGS Ô GENRES Ô COMPOSER Ô
(back to the beginning)
Mode
Playback functions (as on iPod)
ALBM RND *: Same as “Shuffle Albums.”
SONG RND : Same as “Shuffle Songs.”
RND OFF : Cancels.
3
Confirm the selection.
To move back to the previous
* Functions only if you select “ALL” in “ALBUMS” of
menu, press 5.
the main “MENU.”
: Corresponding indicator lights up
on the display
• If a track is selected, playback starts
automatically.
• If the selected item has another layer, you will
enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the
desired track is played (see page 20).
• Holding 4 /¢ can skip 10 items at
a time.
To check other information while listening
to an iPod
* The menu selecting mode will be canceled:
– If no operations are done for about 5 seconds.
– When you confirm the selection of a track.
12
Indication, [Range]
BAS*2 (bass), [–06 to +06]
Sound adjustments
Adjust the bass.
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the
music genre (iEQ: intelligent equalizer).
MID*2 (mid-range), [–06 to +06]
Adjust the mid-range frequencies sound level.
TRE*2 (treble), [–06 to +06]
Adjust the treble.
FAD*3 (fader), [R06 to F06]
Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.
Preset values
BAS*1 MID*2 TRE*3 S.BS*4
BAL*4 (balance), [L06 to R06]
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.
S.BS*2 (super bass), [S.BS ON or S.BS OFF],
[01 to 05, initial: 03]*5
Maintain the richness and fullness of the bass sound
regardless of how low you set the volume.
Indication (For)
USER
(Flat sound)
00
00
00
00
00 OFF
+02 ON
+03 OFF
ROCK
(Rock or disco music)
+03
+01
SUB.W*1 (subwoofer), [00 to 08, initial: 04]
Adjust the subwoofer output level.
CLASSIC
(Classical music)
VOL (volume), [00 to 30 or 50*6]
Adjust the volume.
POPS
(Light music)
+02 +01 +02 OFF
+04 –02 +01 ON
1
*
Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “WOOFER”
(see page 15).
HIP HOP
(Funk or rap music)
2
*
When you adjust the bass, mid-range, treble, or super
bass, the adjustment you have made is stored for the
currently selected sound mode (iEQ) including “USER.”
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader
level to “00.”
This adjustment will not affect the subwoofer output.
Range adjustment for super bass is adjustable only
when it is set to “S.BS ON.“
JAZZ
(Jazz music)
+03
00
+03 OFF
3
*
*1 : Bass; *2 : Mid-range; *3 : Treble; *4 : Super bass
4
5
*
*
Adjusting the sound
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your
preference.
6
*
Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See
page 15 for details.)
1
2
13
General settings — PSM
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items
listed in the table that follows.
3
Adjust the PSM item selected.
1
4
5
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other PSM
items if necessary.
2
Select a PSM item.
Finish the procedure.
Indications
Item
: Initial)
Setting, [reference page]
(
DEMO
• DEMO ON
:
Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no operation
Display
demonstration
is done for about 20 seconds, [6].
Cancels.
• DEMO OFF
• ON
:
:
CLK DISP*1
Clock display
Clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power is
turned off.
• OFF
:
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5 seconds
when the power is turned off, [6].
CLOCK H
Hour adjustment
1 – 12
00 – 59
[Initial: 1 (1:00)], [6].
[Initial: 00 (1:00)], [6].
CLOCK M
Minute adjustment
DIMMER
Dimmer
• ON
• OFF
:
:
Dims the display illumination.
Cancels.
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select “OFF” to
save the car’s battery.
14
Indications
Item
Setting, [reference page]
(
: Initial)
SCROLL*2
Scroll
• ONCE
• AUTO
• OFF
:
:
:
Scrolls the track information once.
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).
Cancels.
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display
regardless of the setting.
L/O MODE
Line output mode
• REAR
:
:
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting the
speakers (through an external amplifier).
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting a
subwoofer (through an external amplifier).
• WOOFER
WOOFER*3
Subwoofer cutoff
frequency
• LOW
• MID
• HIGH
:
:
:
Frequencies lower than 90 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.
Frequencies lower than 135 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.
Frequencies lower than 180 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.
AUX ADJ
A.ADJ 00
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase of the
output level when changing the source from external component
connected to the AUX input jack on the control panel.
Auxiliary input level — A.ADJ 05
adjustment
TAG DISP
Tag display
• TAG ON
• TAG OFF
:
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [10].
Cancels.
AMP GAIN
Amplifier gain
control
• LOW PWR
:
VOL 00 – VOL 30. (Select this if the maximum power of the speaker is
less than 50 W to prevent damaging the speaker.)
VOL 00 – VOL 50.
• HIGH PWR
• AUTO
:
:
IF BAND
Intermediate
frequency band
Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises between
close stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)
Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but sound
quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.
• WIDE
:
2
*
*
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.
Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “WOOFER.”
3
15
Maintenance
External component
operations
You can connect an external component to the AUX
(auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.
How to clean the connectors
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.
Connector
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in
the following cases:
• After starting the heater in the car.
~
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a
few hours until the moisture evaporates.
Ÿ Turn on the connected component and
start playing the source.
! Adjust the volume.
How to handle discs
When removing a disc from its
case, press down the center holder
of the case and lift the disc out,
holding it by the edges.
Center holder
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its
recording surface.
When storing a disc into its case, gently insert the
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface
facing up).
⁄ Adjust the sound as you want. (See
page 13.)
To check other information while listening
to an external component
• Make sure to store discs into the cases after use.
Clock Ô AUX IN
16
To keep discs clean
More about this unit
Basic operations
A dirty disc may not play correctly.
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with
a soft cloth in a straight line from center
to edge.
Turning on the power
• Do not use any solvent (for example, conventional
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean
discs.
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the
power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.
Turning off the power
• If you turn off the power while listening to a track,
playback starts from where playback it has been
stopped previously, next time you turn on the power.
To play new discs
New discs may have some rough spots
around the inner and outer edges. If
such a disc is used, this unit may reject
the disc.
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.
General
• If you change the source while listening to a disc or
an iPod, playback stops.
Next time you select “CD” or “IPOD” as the playback
source, playback starts from where it has been
stopped/paused previously.
• After ejecting a disc or disconnecting an iPod,
“NO DISC” or “NO IPOD” appears and you cannot
operate some of the buttons. Insert another disc,
reconnect an iPod, or press SRC to select another
playback source.
Do not use the following discs:
Warped disc
Sticker
Sticker residue
Tuner operations
Storing stations in memory
Stick-on label
• During SSM search...
– All previously stored stations are erased and
stations are stored newly.
Unusual shape
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).
– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will
be automatically tuned in.
Single CD (8 cm disc)
• When storing a station manually, the previously
preset station is erased when a new station is stored
in the same preset number.
Continued on the next page
17
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective seal stuck
to the surface.
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an
ink jet printer.
Using these discs under high temperatures or high
humidities may cause malfunctions or damage to the
unit.
Disc operations
Caution for DualDisc playback
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on
this product may not be recommended.
General
• This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs/CD
Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs (Rewritable)
in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3 and WMA formats.
• When a disc is inserted upside down, “PLEASE” and
“EJECT” appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to
eject the disc.
• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are
used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or
WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.
Playing an MP3/WMA disc
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of
the letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No
other characters can be correctly displayed.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the
conditions below:
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps
– Sampling frequency:
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
• This unit can play back only files of the same type
which are first detected if a disc includes both audio
CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this
unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the
following reasons:
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Romeo,
Joliet, Windows long file name
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder
names vary among the disc format used (includes 4
extension characters—<.mp3> or <.wma>).
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters
– Romeo: up to 128 characters
– Discs are dirty or scratched.
– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens inside
the unit.
– Joliet: up to 64 characters
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.
– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are written with
“Packet Write” method.
– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of 200
folders, and of 8 hierarchies.
– There are improper recording conditions (missing
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,
warped, etc.).
CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular CDs.
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable
bit rate).
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed
time display, and do not show the actual elapsed
time. Especially, after performing the search function,
this difference becomes noticeable.
•
18
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and
voice format.
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod is charged
through this unit.
• While the iPod is connected, all operations from the
iPod are disabled. Perform all operations from this
unit.
• While connecting an iPod with Video:
– No video shows on the iPod’s display or the
external monitor (only the audio part is available).
– It is not possible to browse video files on the
“Video“ menu. (If you connect the iPod during
playback or pausing of a video file, resuming
playback will not work.)
– WMA files which are not based upon Windows
Media Audio.
®
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have the data such as AIFF, ATRAC3, etc.
• The search function works but search speed is not
constant.
• iPod shuffle is not controllable.
• You can control the iPod from this unit when “JVC” or
Ejecting a disc
“
” appears on the iPod display.
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,
the disc is automatically inserted again into the
loading slot to protect it from dust. Playback starts
automatically.
• The songs order displayed on the selecting menu of
this unit may differ from the iPod.
• If playback is stopped, select a track from the
selecting menu or press ∞.
• The text information may not be displayed correctly.
– Some characters such as accented letters cannot be
shown correctly on the display.
– Depends on the condition of communication
between the iPod and the unit.
• If the text information includes more than 8
characters, it scrolls on the display.
This unit can display up to 40 characters.
iPod operations
Controllable iPod
Software version
iPod with dock connector
(3rd Generation)
2.3 or later
iPod with Click Wheel
(4th Generation)
3.1 or later
iPod mini
iPod photo
iPod nano
1.4 or later
1.2 or later
1.0 or later
1.0 or later
General settings—PSM
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from
“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the volume level
is set higher than “VOL 30,” the unit automatically
changes the volume level to “VOL 30.”
iPod with Video
(5th Generation)
• If your iPod software version is older than those
mentioned above, you may not be able to control the
iPod properly. Update your iPod to the latest software
version before using it with this unit.
– You can check the software version of your iPod
from “About” in the “Setting” menu of the iPod.
– For details about updating your iPod, visit
<http://www.apple.com>.
19
Hierarchical structure of file searching when an iPod is connected
20
Troubleshooting
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers.
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
• The unit does not work at all.
Reset the unit (see page 2).
Store stations manually.
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.
• Static noise while listening to the radio.
• Disc cannot be played back.
Connect the antenna firmly.
Insert the disc correctly.
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be skipped. • Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which
you used for recording.
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 9).
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
• Change the disc.
• Check the cords and connections.
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.
• Disc cannot be played back.
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in the
format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2,
Romeo, or Joliet.
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the
file names.
• Noise is generated.
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or
WMA tracks.)
• A longer readout time is required (“CHECK”
keeps flashing on the display).
Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.
Continued on the next page
21
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Tracks do not play back in the order you have Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.
intended them to play.
•
Elapsed
playing
time
is
not
correct.This
the tracks are recorded on the disc.
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT“ appear alternately on Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.
the display.
• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.
album name).
This unit can only display letters (upper case), numbers,
and a limited number of symbols.
•
The iPod does not turn on or does not work.•
• Update the firmware version.
Check the connecti
•
Charge the battery.
•
•
The
sound
is
e and its connecthtieon.
dist
display.•
“NO
IPOD”
Ch
a
e
p
c
p
k
e
t
a
h
r
e
s
connecting cab
oln
• Charge the battery
•
Playback
stops.The
off the unit’s power and turn it on again.
• No sound can be heard when connecting an • Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.
iPod nano.
• Update the firmware version of the iPod nano.
• “NO FILES” appears on the display.
No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod.
•
“RESET 1”
–
“RESET 7” appears on the display.Reconnect the iPod.
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.
Check the connecting cable and its connection
Reset the iPod.
• The iPod’s controls do not work after
disconnecting from this unit.
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
• iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
22
Specifications
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION
CD PLAYER SECTION
Maximum Power Output:
Type:
Compact disc player
Front/Rear:
Continuous Power Output (RMS):
50 W per channel
Signal Detection
System:
Non-contact optical pickup
(semiconductor laser)
Front/Rear:
19 W per channel into 4 Ω,
Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)
Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more
than 0.8% total harmonic
distortion.
Dynamic Range:
96 dB
Signal-to-Noise Ratio 98 dB
Load Impedance:
Tone Control Range:
Bass:
Mid-range:
Treble:
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)
Wow and Flutter:
Less than measurable limit
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)
12 dB at 60 Hz
12 dB at 1 kHz
12 dB at 7.5 kHz
Max. Bit Rate:
320 kbps
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB
Max. Bit Rate:
192 kbps
Line-Out Level/
Impedance:
Subwoofer-Out
Level/Impedance:
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ
Other Terminal:
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
GENERAL
Power Requirement:
2.5 V /20 kΩ load (full scale)
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V
(11 V to 16 V allowance)
Negative ground
Grounding System:
AUX (auxiliary) input jack,
iPod jack
Allowable Operating 0°C to +40°C
Temperature:
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.)
TUNER SECTION
Frequency Range:
FM:
Installation Size:
Panel Size:
182 mm × 52 mm × 150 mm
187 mm × 58 mm × 13 mm
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHZ
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz
Mass:
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)
AM:
FM Tuner
Usable Sensitivity:
50 dB Quieting
Sensitivity:
Design and specifications are subject to change without
notice.
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
Alternate Channel
65 dB
Selectivity (400 kHz):
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
Stereo Separation:
30 dB
AM Tuner
Sensitivity:
Selectivity:
20 μV
35 dB
23
Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit
Ada MASALAH dengan cara
pengoperasian?
Setel kembali unit Anda
Lihat halaman mengenai Bagaimana mereset unit anda
EN, IN
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
1206DTSMDTJEIN
KD-PDR35
Installation/Connection Manual
Manual Pemasangan/Penyambungan
1206DTSMDTJEIN
EN, IN
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
GET0468-009A
[UN]
INDONESIA
ENGLISH
Alat penerima ini didisain untuk beroperasi hanya pada 12 V DC, sistem listrik tanah NEGATIVE. Jika
kendaraan anda tidak memiliki sistem ini, sebuah pembalik tegangan diperlukan, yang mana dapat dibeli
di penyalur-penyalur audio mobil JVC.
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.
PERINGATAN
WARNINGS
Untuk mencegah hubungan pendek, kami menyarankan anda memutuskan sambungan terminal negatif
baterai dan membuat semua sambungan-sambungan listrik sebelum memasang alat penerima.
• Pastikan untuk mentanahkan alat penerima ini ke casis mobil kembali setelah pemasangan.
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all
electrical connections before installing the unit.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.
Catatan:
Notes:
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio
dealer.
• Ganti sekring dengan voltase yang sudah ditetapkan. Jika sekring sering meledak, konsultasikan pada
penyalur audio mobil JVC anda.
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at
the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than
50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 15 of the
INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.
• Disarankan untuk menghubungkan speaker-speaker dengan maksimum power lebih dari 50 W (keduanya
di belakang dan di depan, dengan sebuah impedansi 4 Ω sampai 8 Ω). Jika maksimum power kurang
dari 50 W, ganti pengaturan “AMP GAIN” (“PENAMBAH PENGUAT”) untuk mencegah speaker-speaker
dari kerusakan (lihat halaman 15 dari BUKU PETUNJUK).
• Untuk mencegah hubungan pendek, tutup ujung-ujung terminal-terminal TIDAK DIGUNAKAN dengan
pita isolasi.
• Pendingin menjadi sangat panas setelah digunakan. Hati-hati untuk tidak menyentuhnya ketika
memindahkan alat penerima ini.
Heat sink
Pendingin
TINDAKAN-TINDAKAN PENCEGAHAN pada suplai power dan
sambungan-sambungan speaker:
• JANGAN sambungkan ujung-ujung speaker dari kabel power ke baterai mobil; sebaliknya,
alat penerima tersebut akan secara serius rusak.
• SEBELUM menyambung ujung-ujung speaker dari kabel power ke speaker-speaker, cek perkabelan
speaker dalam mobil anda.
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit
will be seriously damaged.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in
your car.
Daftar bagian-bagian untuk pemasangan dan penyambungan
Parts list for installation and connection
Bagian-bagian berikut disediakan untuk alat penerima ini. Jika ada bagian yang hilang, segera hubungi
dealer audio mobil JVC anda.
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer
immediately.
A / B
C
D
E
Hard case/Control panel
Kotak keras/Panel kontrol
Sleeve
Selongsong
Trim plate
Plat rapi
Power cord
Kabel power
F
G
H
I
Connection cable for iPod
Kabel koneksi untuk iPod
Cable tie
Ikat kable
Washer (ø5)
Perapat sambungan (ø5)
Lock nut (M5)
Mur kunci (M5)
J
K
L
M
N
Handles
Pegangan-pegangan
Remote controller
Pengontrol jauh
Battery
Baterai
Mounting bolt (M5 × 20 mm)
Baut bingkai (M5 × 20 mm)
Rubber cushion
Bantalan karet
1
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.
PEMASANGAN (BINGKAI-DALAM DASH)
Ilustrasi berikut menunjukkan sebuah tipe pemasangan. Jika anda mempunyai suatu pertanyaan atau
informasi yang diperlukan mengenai alat-alat pemasangan, konsultasikan pada penyalur audio mobil JVC
atau sebuah perusahaan yang mensuplai alat-alat.
• Jika anda tidak yakin bagaimana memasang alat penerima ini dengan benar, biarkan dipasang dengan
teknisi yang berkualitas.
Do the required electrical connections.
Lakukan penyambungan-penyambungan
listrik yang diperlukan.
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the
sleeve firmly in place.
Bengkokkan pengait-pengait yang tepat
untuk menahan selongsong secara kuat
pada tempatnya.
Removing the unit
Memindahkan alat penerima
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.
Sebelum memindahkan alat penerima, lepaskan seksi belakang.
Insert the two handles, then pull them as
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.
Sisipkan kedua pemegang dan tarik pemegang
seperti yang diilustrasikan hingga alat penerima
dapat dipindahkan.
When using the optional stay / Ketika menggunakan
penguat tambahan
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Ketika memasang alat penerima
tanpa menggunakan selongsong
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
Dalam sebuah kereta Toyota misalnya, pertama pindahkan radio mobil dan pasang alat penerima tersebut ke dalam tempatnya.
Stay (option)
Penguat (tambahan)
Fire wall
Dinding tahan api
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Sekrup-sekrup tipe rata (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Dashboard
Tempat alat pada bagian
depan
Bracket*2
Breket*2
Screw (option)
Sekrup (tambahan)
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Sekrup-sekrup tipe rata (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Pocket
Kantong
Bracket*2
Breket*2
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.
Pasang penerima pada suatu sudut kurang
dari 30˚.
Note
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm -long screws. If longer screws are
used, they could damage the unit.
: Ketika memasang alat penerima pada breket bingkai, pastikan untuk menggunakan sekrup-sekrup panjang–
8 mm. Jika sekrup yang lebih panjang digunakan, maka dapat merusak alat penerima.
Catatan
1
1
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.
Not supplied for this unit.
*
*
Ketika anda memberdirikan alat penerima, hati-hati untuk tidak merusak sekring di belakang.
Tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima ini.
2
2
2
ENGLISH
INDONESIA
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
SAMBUNGAN-SAMBUNGAN LISTRIK
A
Typical connections / Ciri khas sambungan-sambungan
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious
damage to this unit.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.
Sebelum penyambungan: Cek perkabelan dalam mobil dengan hati-hati. Penyambungan yang tidak
benar mungkin menyebabkan kerusakan serius pada alat penerima.
Ujung dari kabel power dan beberapa konektor dari bodi mobil mungkin berbeda dalam warna.
1 Sambungkan ujung berwarna dari kabel power dalam urutan spesifikasi pada ilustrasi di bawah.
2 Sambungkan kabel antena.
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.
2 Connect the antenna cord.
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.
3 Akhirnya sambungkan dudukan kabel ke alat penerima.
Loop (see diagram
Loop (lihat diagram
)
)
Rear ground terminal
Terminal tanah belakang
15 A fuse
Sekring 15 A
Antenna terminal
Terminal antena
iPod jack
(see diagram
Jack iPod
)
Ignition switch
Saklar kontak
(lihat diagram
)
Black
Hitam
To metallic body or chassis of the car
Ke besi bodi atau casis dari mobil tersebut
Line out (see diagram
)
Keluaran (lihat diagram
)
Yellow *2
Kuning *2
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
Ke sebuah tempat terminal dalam blok sekring disambungkan ke baterai
mobil (abaikan saklar kontak) (konstant 12 V)
Fuse block
Blok sekring
Red
Merah
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
Ke sebuah terminal aksesoris dalam blok sekring
Blue
Biru
To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)
Ke antena otomatis jika ada (maksimum 250 mA)
Blue with white stripe
Biru dengan strip putih
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)
Ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain (maksimum 200 mA)
White with black stripe
Putih dengan strip hitam
Gray with black stripe
Abu-abu dengan strip hitam
Gray
Abu-abu
Green with black stripe
Hijau dengan strip hitam
Green
Hijau
Purple with black stripe
Ungu dengan strip hitam
Purple
Ungu
White
Putih
Left speaker (front)
Speaker kiri (depan)
Right speaker (front)
Speaker kanan (depan)
Left speaker (rear)
Speaker kiri (belakang)
Right speaker (rear)
Speaker kanan (belakang)
1
1
2
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.
*
*
Tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima ini.
Sebelum pengecekan pengoperasian dari alat penerima ini sebelum pemasangan, ujung ini harus sudah
dihubungkan, selain itu power tidak dapat dihidupkan.
2
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise power
cannot be turned on.
3
Connecting the external amplifier or subwoofer Penyambungan penguat eksternal atau subwoofer
B
/
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it
can be controlled through this unit.
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker
leads of this unit unused.
Anda dapat menyambungkan penguat untuk meningkatkan sistem stereo mobil anda.
• Sambungkan ujung jauh (biru dengan strip putih) ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain sehingga dapat
dikontrol melalui alat penerima ini.
• Putuskan sambungan speaker-speaker dari alat penerima ini, sambungkan ini ke penguat.
Biarkan ujung speaker dari alat penerima ini tidak digunakan.
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
Konektor Y (tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima ini)
Set “L/O MODE” to “REAR” (See page 15 of the
INSTRUCTIONS.)
Setel “L/O MODE ” ke “REAR” (Lihat halaman 15 dari
BUKU PETUNJUK.)
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)
Ujung jauh (biru dengan strip putih)
Rear speakers
Speaker-speaker
JVC Amplifier
Penguat JVC
To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any
Ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain atau antena otomatis jika ada
belakang
Set “L/O MODE” to “WOOFER” (See page 15 of the
INSTRUCTIONS.)
Setel “L/O MODE ” ke “WOOFER” (Lihat halaman 15 dari
BUKU PETUNJUK.)
Front speakers
Speaker-speaker depan
or
atau
Subwoofer
Subwoofer
JVC Amplifier
Penguat JVC
Connecting an Apple iPod Menghubungkan Apple iPod
C
/
Apple iPod (separately purchased)
Apple iPod (dibeli terpisah)
Cable tie
You can connect an iPod to this unit using the supplied connection cable for iPod.
1 Insert the supplied cable tie across the loop.
2 Press in the head of the connection cable for iPod until you hear a clicking sound.
Ikat kabel
3 Fasten the connection cable using the cable tie to firmly hold the connection cable in place.
Anda dapat menghubungkan iPod dengan menggunakan kabel koneksi iPod yang disediakan.
1 Masukkan kabel yang disediakan, ikat melintasi lingkaran.
2 Tekan pada bagian kepala kabel sambungan untuk iPod sampai Anda mendengar bunyi klik.
3 Kencangkan kabel sambungan dengan menggunakan ikat kabel agar kabel sambungan terpaku di
dalam tempatnya.
Connection cable for iPod (supplied)
Kabel koneksi untuk iPod (disediakan)
Loop
Loop
iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
iPod adalah merek dagang dari Apple Computer, Inc., terdaftar di Amerika Serikat dan di negara-negara lain.
3
3
*
Pasangkan dengan kuat kabel tanah ke bodi besi atau ke casis dari mobil—pada tempat yang tidak dilapisi cat
(jika dilapisi cat, hilangkan cat sebelum memasang kabel). Kegagalan melakukan ini mungkin menyebabkan
kerusakan pada alat penerima tersebut.
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint
(if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the
unit.
Remote lead
4
5
4
5
*
*
Ujung jauh
*
*
Kabel sinyal (tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima ini)
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit).
TROUBLESHOOTING
PEMECAHAN MASALAH
• The fuse blows.
• Sekring meledak.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?
* Apakah ujung-ujung merah dan hitam tersambung dengan benar?
• Power cannot be turned on.
• Power tidak dapat dihidupkan.
* Is the yellow lead connected?
* Apakah ujung kuning sudah tersambung?
• No sound from the speakers.
• Tidak ada suara dari speaker.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker terhubung pendek?
• Sound is distorted.
• Suara terdistorsi.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker sudah ditanahkan?
* Apakah terminal-terminal “–” dari speaker-speaker L dan R sudah ditanahkan secara umum?
• Noise interfere with sounds.
• Berisik yang mengganggu suara-suara.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?
* Apakah terminal tanahan belakang tersambung ke casis mobil menggunakan kabel-kabel terpendek dan
tertebal?
• This unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
• Alat penerima menjadi panas.
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker sudah ditanahkan?
* Apakah terminal-terminal “–” dari speaker-speaker L dan R sudah ditanahkan secara umum?
• This unit does not work at all.
* Have you reset your unit?
• Alat penerima ini tidak bekerja secara keseluruhan.
* Apakah anda sudah reset (memasang kembali) alat penerima anda?
4
CD RECEIVER
KD-PDR35
KD-PDR35
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.
INSTRUCTIONS
GET0468-005A
[UT]
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best
possible performance from the unit.
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical
instruments.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.
How to reset your unit
[European Union only]
Warning:
•
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be
sure to look ahead carefully or you may be involved
in a traffic accident.
How to forcibly eject a disc
Caution on volume setting:
•
•
Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.
If this does not work, reset your unit.
Discs produce very little noise compared with other
sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc
to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden
increase of the output level.
2
How to use the M MODE button
CONTENTS
If you press M MODE, the unit goes into functions mode,
then the number buttons and 5/∞ buttons work as
different function buttons.
Control panel ..................................
Remote controller — RM-RK50...........
4
5
Ex.: When number button 2 works as MO (monaural)
button.
Getting started................................
Basic operations...................................................
6
6
Radio operations .............................
7
Disc operations................................
Playing a disc in the unit .....................................
8
8
To use these buttons for their original functions
again after pressing M MODE, wait for 5 seconds
without pressing any of these buttons until the
functions mode is cleared or press M MODE again.
iPod operations ............................... 11
Sound adjustments.......................... 13
General settings — PSM .................. 14
External component operations ....... 16
Maintenance ................................... 16
More about this unit ........................ 17
Troubleshooting.............................. 21
Specifications.................................. 23
Detaching the control panel
For safety...
Attaching the control panel
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any complicated
operations.
Temperature inside the car...
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes
normal before operating the unit.
3
Control panel
Parts identification
Display window
1
Control dial
o
;
a
s
RND (random) button
M MODE button
(control panel release) button
Disc information indicators—
TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)
DISC indicator
Playback mode / item indicators— RND (random),
(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)
Tuner reception indicators—MO (monaural),
ST (stereo)
2 0 (eject) button
3
4
5
Loading slot
EQ (equalizer) button
DISP (display) button
6 4 /¢ buttons
d
f
7
8
9
Display window
(standby/on attenuator) button
AUX (auxiliary) input jack
g
p 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons
q
w
e
r
SEL (select) button
BAND button
SRC (source) button
Remote sensor
DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).
MO (monaural) button
SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button
Number buttons
h
j
k
l
/
z
S.BASS (super bass) indicator
EQ (equalizer) indicator
Tr (track) indicator
Source display / Time countdown indicator
Main display
Sound mode (iEQ: intelligent equalizer)
indicators—JAZZ, ROCK, HIP HOP, CLASSIC, POPS,
USER
t
y
u
i
RPT (repeat) button
4
Main elements and features
Remote controller —
RM-RK50
Installing the lithium coin battery
(CR2025)
CR2025
Aim the remote controller directly at the remote
sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle
in between.
1
(standby/on/attenuator) button
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or
attenuates the sound when the power is on.
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.
Warning:
2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons
• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.
• Changes the preset stations with D ∞.
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA discs.
• While listening to an Apple iPod.
– Pauses or resumes playback with D ∞.
– Enters the main menu with 5 U.
(Now 5 U/D ∞/2 R/F 3 work as the menu
selecting buttons.)*
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or its
equivalent; otherwise, it may explode.
• Do not leave the remote controller in a place
(such as dashboards) exposed to direct sunlight
for a long time; otherwise, it may explode.
• Store the battery in a place where children cannot
reach to avoid risk of accident.
• To prevent the battery from over-heating,
cracking, or starting a fire:
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the
battery, or dispose of it in a fire.
3
VOL – / VOL + buttons
• Adjusts the volume level.
SOUND button
4
• Selects the sound mode (iEQ: intelligent
equalizer).
– Do not leave the battery with other metallic
materials.
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or
similar tools.
5
SOURCE button
• Selects the source.
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when
throwing away or saving it.
* 5 U : Returns to the previous menu.
D ∞ : Confirms the selection.
Continued on the next page
5
6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and
held.
@ Adjust the sound as you want. (See
page 13.)
• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.
• While listening to an iPod (in menu selecting
mode):
– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then, press
D ∞ to confirm the selection.)
To drop the volume in a
moment (ATT)
To restore the sound, press
the button again.
To turn off the power
– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and held.
Getting started
Basic settings
Basic operations
~ Turn on the power.
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages 14 and
15.
1
2
Ÿ
1 Canceling the display demonstrations
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”
2 Setting the clock
Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust the hour.
Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then adjust the
minute.
1
*
You cannot select “CD” as the playback source
if there is no disc in the unit.
“NO IPOD” appears if iPod is not connected.
2
*
3
Finish the procedure.
! For FM/AM tuner
To check the current clock time while the
power is turned off
⁄ Adjust the volume.
Clock time is shown on the display for
about 5 seconds. See also page 14.
VOL 20
Volume level appears.
6
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to
receive
Radio operations
~
Lights up when monaural mode is activated.
Ÿ
MONO
Lights up when receiving an FM stereo
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.
Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same
procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO indicator
goes off.
88.3
! Start searching for a station.
Storing stations in memory
You can preset six stations for each band.
When a station is received, searching stops.
To stop searching, press the same button
again.
FM station automatic presetting—
SSM (Strong-station Sequential
Memory)
1
Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to
store into.
To tune in to a station manually
In step ! above...
1
2
3
M
2
Select a desired station frequency.
SSM
“SSM” flashes, then disappears when automatic
presetting is over.
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are
searched and stored automatically in the FM band.
7
Manual presetting
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset
number 4 of the FM1 band.
Disc operations
Playing a disc in the unit
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the
source or eject the disc.
1
2
FM I 92.5
3
P4
92.5
Preset number flashes for a while.
To stop play and eject the disc
• Press SRC to listen to another
playback source.
Listening to a preset station
1
2
To fast-forward or reverse the track
To go to the next or previous tracks
Select the preset station (1 – 6) you want.
or
To go to the next or previous folders (only for
MP3 or WMA discs)
To check other information while listening
to the radio
Clock Ô Frequency
8
To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder
(for MP3 or WMA discs) directly
Other main functions
To select a number from 01 – 06:
Skipping tracks quickly during play
• For MP3 or WMA discs, you can skip tracks within the
same folder.
To select a number from 07 – 12:
Ex.: To select track 32 while playing a track whose
number is a single digit (1 to 9)
1
2
• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA discs, it
is required that folders are assigned with 2-digit
numbers at the beginning of their folder names—
01, 02, 03, and so on.
Each time you press the button, you can skip 10
tracks.
To select a particular track in a folder
(for MP3 or WMA discs):
• After the last track, the first track will be selected
and vice versa.
3
Prohibiting disc ejection
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.
NO EJECT
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same
procedure.
9
Changing the display information
While playing an audio CD or a CD Text
Selecting the playback modes
You can use only one of the following playback modes
at a time.
1
2
Select your desired playback mode.
Repeat play
7
While playing an MP3 or a WMA track
• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG ON”
(see page 15)
Mode
Plays repeatedly
TRK RPT
: The current track.
FLDR RPT* : All tracks of the current folder.
RPT OFF
: Cancels.
7
Random play
Mode
Plays at random
• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG OFF”
FLDR RND* : All tracks of the current folder,
then tracks of the next folder
and so on.
DISC RND
: All tracks of the current disc.
RND OFF
: Cancels.
: Clock with the current track number
: Elapsed playing time with the current
track number
: Corresponding indicator lights up on
the display
* Only while playing an MP3 or a WMA disc.
: Corresponding indicator lights up
on the display
1
2
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information,
folder name and file name appear. In this case, the
TAG indicator will not light up.
10
Caution:
iPod operations
You can play songs from an Apple iPod through this unit
by connecting it with the supplied connection cable for
iPod.
• Avoid using the iPod if it might hinder your safety
driving.
• Make sure all important data has been backed up
to avoid losing the data.
• Disconnecting the iPod will stop playback. Press SRC
to listen to another playback source.
To pause playback
• For connection, see Installation/Connection Manual
(separate volume).
To resume playback, press the
button again.
• For details, refer also to the manual supplied with
your iPod.
~ Connect an iPod.
To fast-forward or reverse the track
To go to the next or previous tracks
Connection cable for iPod
If an iPod has been connected...
Playback starts automatically from where it has
been paused previously.
Ÿ Adjust the volume.
! Adjust the sound as you want. (See
page 13.)
11
Selecting a track from the menu
Selecting the playback modes
1
2
Enter the main menu.
1
2
Select your desired playback mode.
7
Repeat play
Now the 5/∞/4 /¢ buttons work as
the menu selecting buttons*.
Mode
Playback functions (as on iPod)
Select the desired menu.
ONE RPT : Same as “Repeat One.”
ALL RPT
RPT OFF
: Same as “Repeat All.”
: Cancels.
7
Random play
PLAYLIST Ô ARTISTS Ô ALBUMS Ô
SONGS Ô GENRES Ô COMPOSER Ô
(back to the beginning)
Mode
Playback functions (as on iPod)
ALBM RND *: Same as “Shuffle Albums.”
SONG RND : Same as “Shuffle Songs.”
RND OFF : Cancels.
3
Confirm the selection.
To move back to the previous
* Functions only if you select “ALL” in “ALBUMS” of
menu, press 5.
the main “MENU.”
: Corresponding indicator lights up
on the display
• If a track is selected, playback starts
automatically.
• If the selected item has another layer, you will
enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the
desired track is played (see page 20).
• Holding 4 /¢ can skip 10 items at
a time.
To check other information while listening
to an iPod
* The menu selecting mode will be canceled:
– If no operations are done for about 5 seconds.
– When you confirm the selection of a track.
12
Indication, [Range]
BAS*2 (bass), [–06 to +06]
Sound adjustments
Adjust the bass.
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the
music genre (iEQ: intelligent equalizer).
MID*2 (mid-range), [–06 to +06]
Adjust the mid-range frequencies sound level.
TRE*2 (treble), [–06 to +06]
Adjust the treble.
FAD*3 (fader), [R06 to F06]
Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.
Preset values
BAS*1 MID*2 TRE*3 S.BS*4
BAL*4 (balance), [L06 to R06]
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.
S.BS*2 (super bass), [S.BS ON or S.BS OFF],
[01 to 05, initial: 03]*5
Maintain the richness and fullness of the bass sound
regardless of how low you set the volume.
Indication (For)
USER
(Flat sound)
00
00
00
00
00 OFF
+02 ON
+03 OFF
ROCK
(Rock or disco music)
+03
+01
SUB.W*1 (subwoofer), [00 to 08, initial: 04]
Adjust the subwoofer output level.
CLASSIC
(Classical music)
VOL (volume), [00 to 30 or 50*6]
Adjust the volume.
POPS
(Light music)
+02 +01 +02 OFF
+04 –02 +01 ON
1
*
Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “WOOFER”
(see page 15).
HIP HOP
(Funk or rap music)
2
*
When you adjust the bass, mid-range, treble, or super
bass, the adjustment you have made is stored for the
currently selected sound mode (iEQ) including “USER.”
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader
level to “00.”
This adjustment will not affect the subwoofer output.
Range adjustment for super bass is adjustable only
when it is set to “S.BS ON.“
JAZZ
(Jazz music)
+03
00
+03 OFF
3
*
*1 : Bass; *2 : Mid-range; *3 : Treble; *4 : Super bass
4
5
*
*
Adjusting the sound
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your
preference.
6
*
Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See
page 15 for details.)
1
2
13
General settings — PSM
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items
listed in the table that follows.
3
Adjust the PSM item selected.
1
4
5
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other PSM
items if necessary.
2
Select a PSM item.
Finish the procedure.
Indications
Item
: Initial)
Setting, [reference page]
(
DEMO
• DEMO ON
:
Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no operation
Display
demonstration
is done for about 20 seconds, [6].
Cancels.
• DEMO OFF
• ON
:
:
CLK DISP*1
Clock display
Clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power is
turned off.
• OFF
:
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5 seconds
when the power is turned off, [6].
CLOCK H
Hour adjustment
1 – 12
00 – 59
[Initial: 1 (1:00)], [6].
[Initial: 00 (1:00)], [6].
CLOCK M
Minute adjustment
DIMMER
Dimmer
• ON
• OFF
:
:
Dims the display illumination.
Cancels.
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select “OFF” to
save the car’s battery.
14
Indications
Item
Setting, [reference page]
(
: Initial)
SCROLL*2
Scroll
• ONCE
• AUTO
• OFF
:
:
:
Scrolls the track information once.
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).
Cancels.
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display
regardless of the setting.
L/O MODE
Line output mode
• REAR
:
:
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting the
speakers (through an external amplifier).
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting a
subwoofer (through an external amplifier).
• WOOFER
WOOFER*3
Subwoofer cutoff
frequency
• LOW
• MID
• HIGH
:
:
:
Frequencies lower than 90 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.
Frequencies lower than 135 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.
Frequencies lower than 180 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.
AUX ADJ
A.ADJ 00
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase of the
output level when changing the source from external component
connected to the AUX input jack on the control panel.
Auxiliary input level — A.ADJ 05
adjustment
TAG DISP
Tag display
• TAG ON
• TAG OFF
:
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [10].
Cancels.
AMP GAIN
Amplifier gain
control
• LOW PWR
:
VOL 00 – VOL 30. (Select this if the maximum power of the speaker is
less than 50 W to prevent damaging the speaker.)
VOL 00 – VOL 50.
• HIGH PWR
• AUTO
:
:
IF BAND
Intermediate
frequency band
Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises between
close stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)
Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but sound
quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.
• WIDE
:
2
*
*
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.
Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “WOOFER.”
3
15
Maintenance
External component
operations
You can connect an external component to the AUX
(auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.
How to clean the connectors
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.
Connector
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in
the following cases:
• After starting the heater in the car.
~
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a
few hours until the moisture evaporates.
Ÿ Turn on the connected component and
start playing the source.
! Adjust the volume.
How to handle discs
When removing a disc from its
case, press down the center holder
of the case and lift the disc out,
holding it by the edges.
Center holder
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its
recording surface.
When storing a disc into its case, gently insert the
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface
facing up).
⁄ Adjust the sound as you want. (See
page 13.)
To check other information while listening
to an external component
• Make sure to store discs into the cases after use.
Clock Ô AUX IN
16
To keep discs clean
More about this unit
Basic operations
A dirty disc may not play correctly.
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with
a soft cloth in a straight line from center
to edge.
Turning on the power
• Do not use any solvent (for example, conventional
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean
discs.
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the
power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.
Turning off the power
• If you turn off the power while listening to a track,
playback starts from where playback it has been
stopped previously, next time you turn on the power.
To play new discs
New discs may have some rough spots
around the inner and outer edges. If
such a disc is used, this unit may reject
the disc.
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.
General
• If you change the source while listening to a disc or
an iPod, playback stops.
Next time you select “CD” or “IPOD” as the playback
source, playback starts from where it has been
stopped/paused previously.
• After ejecting a disc or disconnecting an iPod,
“NO DISC” or “NO IPOD” appears and you cannot
operate some of the buttons. Insert another disc,
reconnect an iPod, or press SRC to select another
playback source.
Do not use the following discs:
Warped disc
Sticker
Sticker residue
Tuner operations
Storing stations in memory
Stick-on label
• During SSM search...
– All previously stored stations are erased and
stations are stored newly.
Unusual shape
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).
– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will
be automatically tuned in.
Single CD (8 cm disc)
• When storing a station manually, the previously
preset station is erased when a new station is stored
in the same preset number.
Continued on the next page
17
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective seal stuck
to the surface.
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an
ink jet printer.
Using these discs under high temperatures or high
humidities may cause malfunctions or damage to the
unit.
Disc operations
Caution for DualDisc playback
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on
this product may not be recommended.
General
• This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs/CD
Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs (Rewritable)
in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3 and WMA formats.
• When a disc is inserted upside down, “PLEASE” and
“EJECT” appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to
eject the disc.
• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are
used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or
WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.
Playing an MP3/WMA disc
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of
the letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No
other characters can be correctly displayed.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the
conditions below:
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps
– Sampling frequency:
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
• This unit can play back only files of the same type
which are first detected if a disc includes both audio
CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this
unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the
following reasons:
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Romeo,
Joliet, Windows long file name
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder
names vary among the disc format used (includes 4
extension characters—<.mp3> or <.wma>).
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters
– Romeo: up to 128 characters
– Discs are dirty or scratched.
– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens inside
the unit.
– Joliet: up to 64 characters
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.
– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are written with
“Packet Write” method.
– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of 200
folders, and of 8 hierarchies.
– There are improper recording conditions (missing
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,
warped, etc.).
CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular CDs.
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable
bit rate).
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed
time display, and do not show the actual elapsed
time. Especially, after performing the search function,
this difference becomes noticeable.
•
18
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and
voice format.
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod is charged
through this unit.
• While the iPod is connected, all operations from the
iPod are disabled. Perform all operations from this
unit.
• While connecting an iPod with Video:
– No video shows on the iPod’s display or the
external monitor (only the audio part is available).
– It is not possible to browse video files on the
“Video“ menu. (If you connect the iPod during
playback or pausing of a video file, resuming
playback will not work.)
– WMA files which are not based upon Windows
Media Audio.
®
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have the data such as AIFF, ATRAC3, etc.
• The search function works but search speed is not
constant.
• iPod shuffle is not controllable.
• You can control the iPod from this unit when “JVC” or
Ejecting a disc
“
” appears on the iPod display.
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,
the disc is automatically inserted again into the
loading slot to protect it from dust. Playback starts
automatically.
• The songs order displayed on the selecting menu of
this unit may differ from the iPod.
• If playback is stopped, select a track from the
selecting menu or press ∞.
• The text information may not be displayed correctly.
– Some characters such as accented letters cannot be
shown correctly on the display.
– Depends on the condition of communication
between the iPod and the unit.
• If the text information includes more than 8
characters, it scrolls on the display.
This unit can display up to 40 characters.
iPod operations
Controllable iPod
Software version
iPod with dock connector
(3rd Generation)
2.3 or later
iPod with Click Wheel
(4th Generation)
3.1 or later
iPod mini
iPod photo
iPod nano
1.4 or later
1.2 or later
1.0 or later
1.0 or later
General settings—PSM
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from
“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the volume level
is set higher than “VOL 30,” the unit automatically
changes the volume level to “VOL 30.”
iPod with Video
(5th Generation)
• If your iPod software version is older than those
mentioned above, you may not be able to control the
iPod properly. Update your iPod to the latest software
version before using it with this unit.
– You can check the software version of your iPod
from “About” in the “Setting” menu of the iPod.
– For details about updating your iPod, visit
<http://www.apple.com>.
19
Hierarchical structure of file searching when an iPod is connected
20
Troubleshooting
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers.
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
• The unit does not work at all.
Reset the unit (see page 2).
Store stations manually.
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.
• Static noise while listening to the radio.
• Disc cannot be played back.
Connect the antenna firmly.
Insert the disc correctly.
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be skipped. • Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which
you used for recording.
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 9).
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
• Change the disc.
• Check the cords and connections.
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.
• Disc cannot be played back.
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in the
format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2,
Romeo, or Joliet.
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the
file names.
• Noise is generated.
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or
WMA tracks.)
• A longer readout time is required (“CHECK”
keeps flashing on the display).
Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.
Continued on the next page
21
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Tracks do not play back in the order you have Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.
intended them to play.
•
Elapsed
playing
time
is
not
correct.This
the tracks are recorded on the disc.
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT“ appear alternately on Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.
the display.
• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.
album name).
This unit can only display letters (upper case), numbers,
and a limited number of symbols.
•
The iPod does not turn on or does not work.•
• Update the firmware version.
Check the connectin
•
Charge the battery.
•
•
The
sound
is
e and its connecthtieon.
disto
display.•
“NO
IPOD”
Ch
a
e
p
c
p
k
e
t
a
h
r
e
s
connecting cab
oln
• Charge the battery
•
Playback
stops.The
off the unit’s power and turn it on again.
h
• No sound can be heard when connecting an • Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.
iPod nano.
• Update the firmware version of the iPod nano.
• “NO FILES” appears on the display.
No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod.
•
“RESET 1”
–
“RESET 7” appears on the display.Reconnect the iPod.
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.
Check the connecting cable and its connection
Reset the iPod.
• The iPod’s controls do not work after
disconnecting from this unit.
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
• iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
22
Specifications
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION
CD PLAYER SECTION
Maximum Power Output:
Type:
Compact disc player
Front/Rear:
Continuous Power Output (RMS):
50 W per channel
Signal Detection
System:
Non-contact optical pickup
(semiconductor laser)
Front/Rear:
19 W per channel into 4 Ω,
Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)
Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more
than 0.8% total harmonic
distortion.
Dynamic Range:
96 dB
Signal-to-Noise Ratio 98 dB
Load Impedance:
Tone Control Range:
Bass:
Mid-range:
Treble:
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)
Wow and Flutter:
Less than measurable limit
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)
12 dB at 60 Hz
12 dB at 1 kHz
12 dB at 7.5 kHz
Max. Bit Rate:
320 kbps
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB
Max. Bit Rate:
192 kbps
Line-Out Level/
Impedance:
Subwoofer-Out
Level/Impedance:
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ
Other Terminal:
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
GENERAL
Power Requirement:
2.5 V /20 kΩ load (full scale)
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V
(11 V to 16 V allowance)
Negative ground
Grounding System:
AUX (auxiliary) input jack,
iPod jack
Allowable Operating 0°C to +40°C
Temperature:
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.)
TUNER SECTION
Frequency Range:
FM:
Installation Size:
Panel Size:
182 mm × 52 mm × 150 mm
187 mm × 58 mm × 13 mm
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHZ
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz
Mass:
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)
AM:
FM Tuner
Usable Sensitivity:
50 dB Quieting
Sensitivity:
Design and specifications are subject to change without
notice.
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
Alternate Channel
65 dB
Selectivity (400 kHz):
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
Stereo Separation:
30 dB
AM Tuner
Sensitivity:
Selectivity:
20 μV
35 dB
23
Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit
EN, CT
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
1206DTSMDTJEIN
KD-PDR35
Installation/Connection Manual
安裝/連接手冊
1206DTSMDTJEIN
EN, CT
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
GET0468-010A
[UT]
中文
ENGLISH
本機僅可使用直流 12 V、負極接地的電源系統。如果您的車輛沒有這一電源
壓變換器,可以在 JVC 汽車音響分銷商處買到。
系統,則需要 一個電
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.
警告
WARNINGS
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all
electrical connections before installing the unit.
為防止短路,建議在安裝本機之前
• 安裝完畢後務必將本機的地線重新接至車身。
,斷開電池的負極,並把所有電路都連接好。
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.
注意:
Notes:
•
把保險 絲更換為額定負荷值的保險 絲。如果保險 絲經常燒壞,請向
• 後置和前 揚聲器的最大輸入功率應大於 50 W,其阻抗為 4 Ω - 8 Ω。如果最大功率小於 50 W,
請調校“AMP GAIN”設定值,以防止揚聲器損壞。(參閱使用說明書的第 15 頁。)
• 為防止電源短路,請用絕緣帶包住未使用電線的端子。
JVC 汽車音響分銷商詢問。
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio
置
dealer.
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at
the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than
50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 15 of the
INSTRUCTIONS).
• 本機使用後,散熱片會很熱。因此,在移出本機時,小心不要 觸摸散熱片。
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.
Heat sink
散熱片
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit
電源和揚聲器接線注意事項:
• 切勿把揚聲器導線接頭接至電池,否則本機將會嚴重損壞。
will be seriously damaged.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in
• 在把揚聲器導線接頭接至揚聲器之前
,檢查您汽車上的揚聲器線路。
your car.
Parts list for installation and connection
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer
immediately.
用於安裝和連接的零件清單
下列零件隨本機提供。若有任何遺漏,立刻咨詢您的 JVC 汽車音響經銷商。
A / B
Hard case/Control panel
C
D
E
Sleeve
外套機殼
Trim plate
裝飾框
Power cord
電路連接用的配線束
硬盒/控制面
板
I
F
G
H
Lock nut (M5)
鎖定螺母(M5)
Connection cable for iPod
iPod 連接電纜
Cable tie
電纜紮帶
Washer (ø5)
墊圈(ø5)
J
K
L
M
N
Rubber cushion
橡膠防震墊
Handles
板條型把手
Remote controller
Battery
電池
Mounting bolt (M5 × 20 mm)
搖
控器
緊固
螺栓(M5 × 20 mm)
1
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)
安裝(裝設、固定在儀表板內)
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.
下面的圖解表示了典型的安裝程序。如果您有問題,或需要 有關配套元件的資料,請向 JVC
汽車音響分銷商或配套元件供應公司詢問。
• 如果您不能確定如何正確地安裝本機,應請合格的技術人員來安裝。
Do the required electrical connections.
進行所需的電路連接。
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the
sleeve firmly in place.
弄彎機殼的突舌,把外套機殼牢固
在儀
表板內。
Removing the unit
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.
拆卸本機
在拆卸本機前
,應將本機後部的固定和連接部分鬆開。
Insert the two handles, then pull them as
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.
按圖所示,將兩片板條型把手插入卡槽,然
後輕穩地從兩側向
外拉兩片把手,本機隨
之拉出。
When using the optional stay / 若選用支撐架
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / 若不使用外套機殼安裝本機
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
Stay (option)
支撐架(選用的)
以豐田牌(TOYOTA)汽車為例:首先取出汽車收音機,然後將本機裝入其空出的位置
。
Fire wall
防火板
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
平頭螺絲釘(M5 × 8 mm)*2
Dashboard
儀表板
Bracket*2
托座*2
Screw (option)
螺絲釘(選用的)
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
平頭螺絲釘(M5 × 8 mm)*2
Pocket
空殼
Bracket*2
托座*2
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.
Note
:When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm -long screws. If longer screws
are used, they could damage the unit.
將本機安裝在少於 30˚ 的角度
。
注意
:把本機安裝在托座上時,務必使用 8 mm 長的螺絲釘。如使用過長的螺絲釘,會損壞本機。
1
2
1
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.
Not supplied for this unit.
*
*
您豎起本機時,小心不要 損壞底部的保險 絲。
不隨本機提供。
2
2
ENGLISH
中文
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
電路連接
A
Typical connections / 典型的接線方法
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious
damage to this unit.
接線前:仔細檢查汽車內的線路。不正確的接線會導致本機嚴重 損壞。
電源線的引線和車身的連接器引線在顏色上可能有所不同。
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.
1 依照下圖所示之次序連接電源
線的顏色導線。
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.
2 Connect the antenna cord.
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.
2 將天線的電線連接起來。
3 最後,把配線束的插頭插在本機上。
Loop (see diagram
線圈(參閱圖表
)
)
Rear ground terminal
本機後背接地端子
15 A fuse
15 A 保險
絲
Antenna terminal
天線端子
iPod jack
(see diagram
iPod 插座
(參閱圖表
)
)
Ignition switch
點火開關
Black
黑色
To metallic body or chassis of the car
接至金屬體或汽車底盤
Line out (see diagram
輸出端子(參閱圖表
)
)
Yellow *2
黃色 *2
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
接至保險 絲單元內的附屬端子,保險 絲單元與車裝電池相連接
(用於旁路點火開關)(恆定 12 V)
Fuse block
保險 絲單元
Red
紅色
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
接至保險 絲單元內的附屬端子
Blue
藍色
To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)
接至自動天線(若有裝設)(最大 250 mA)
Blue with white stripe
藍色帶有白色條紋
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)
連接至其他裝置上的遙控導線(最大 200 mA)
White with black stripe
白色帶有黑色條紋
White
白色
Gray with black stripe
灰色帶有黑色條紋
Gray
灰色
Green with black stripe
綠色帶有黑色條紋
Green
綠色
Purple with black stripe
紫色帶有黑色條紋
Purple
紫色
Left speaker (front)
Right speaker (front)
Left speaker (rear)
Right speaker (rear)
左揚聲器(前
置
)
右揚聲器(前
置
)
左揚聲器(後置
)
右揚聲器(後置
)
1
2
1
2
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.
*
*
不隨本機提供。
本機未安裝時,進行工作狀況
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise power
cannot be turned on.
檢查之前
,必須把這導線接上,否則
不能開啟電源
。
3
Connecting the external amplifier or subwoofer 連接至外部功率放大器或超重低音揚聲器
B
/
You can connect amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it
can be controlled through this unit.
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker
leads of this unit unused.
您可以連接功率放大器以提昇尊
將遙控導線(藍色帶有白色條紋)和其他裝置上的遙控導線連接起來,以便可以通過本機進行
遙控。
車的音響系統。
•
• 將揚聲器和本機斷開,再接上功率放大器。將本機的揚聲器接線放置不用。
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
Y-型連接導線(不隨本機提供)
Set “L/O MODE” to “REAR” (See page 15 of the
INSTRUCTIONS.)
將“L/O MODE”設定為“REAR”(參閱使用
說明書的第 15 頁。)
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)
遙控導線(藍色帶有白色條紋)
Rear speakers
揚聲器
JVC Amplifier
JVC 功率放大器
To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any
後置
連接至其他裝置
上的遙控導線或自動天線(若有裝設)
Set “L/O MODE” to “WOOFER” (See page 15 of the
INSTRUCTIONS.)
將“L/O MODE”設定為“WOOFER”(參閱使用
說明書的第 15 頁。)
Front speakers
前
置
揚聲器
or
或
Subwoofer
超重 低音揚聲器
JVC Amplifier
JVC 功率放大器
Connecting an Apple iPod 連接 Apple iPod
C
/
Apple iPod (separately purchased)
You can connect an iPod to this unit using the supplied connection cable for iPod.
1 Insert the supplied cable tie across the loop.
Apple iPod(另購)
Cable tie
電纜紮帶
2 Press in the head of the connection cable for iPod until you hear a clicking sound.
3 Fasten the connection cable using the cable tie to firmly hold the connection cable in place.
您可以使用附帶的 iPod 連接電纜將 iPod 和本機連接起來。
1 將附帶的電纜紮帶系在線圈上。
2 按住 iPod 連接電纜的頭部直至您聽到一聲卡嗒聲。
3 使用電纜紮帶來固
定 iPod 連接電纜的位置
。
Connection cable for iPod (supplied)
iPod 連接電纜(附帶)
Loop
線圈
iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
iPod 是 Apple Computer, Inc.(蘋果電腦公司)在美國及其他國家注冊的商標。
3
3
*
將地線與金屬車體或者汽車底盤緊密連接,連接處應該沒有被油漆覆蓋(如果已塗上油漆,在連接電
線前,將油漆刮去)。如果不這樣做,可能會損壞本機。
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint
(if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the
unit.
Remote lead
4
5
*
*
遙控導線
4
5
*
*
信號電纜(不隨本機提供)。
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit).
TROUBLESHOOTING
故障排除
• The fuse blows.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?
• 保險絲燒斷。
* 檢查紅色導線接頭和黑色導線接頭是否接觸正確?
• Power cannot be turned on.
* Is the yellow lead connected?
• 電源不能接通。
* 檢查黃色導線接頭是否接上?
• No sound from the speakers.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
• 揚聲器沒有聲音。
* 檢查揚聲器輸出導線接頭是否短路?
• Sound is distorted.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• 聲音失真。
* 檢查揚聲器輸出端子是否接地?
* 檢查揚聲器的左(L)、右(R)端子的負極(–)是否共同接地?
• Noise interfere with sounds.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?
• 噪音干擾音響。
* 後接地端子與車身是否使用較短和較厚
的電線連接?
• This unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• 本機發熱。
* 檢查揚聲器輸出端子是否接地?
* 檢查揚聲器的左(L)、右(R)端子的負極(–)是否共同接地?
• This unit does not work at all.
* Have you reset your unit?
• 本機完全不能操作。
* 您是否已經重 設您的機組?
4
|
A4 Tech PK 35N User Manual
Canon EF100 400mm f 4 5 5 6L IS USM User Manual
Dymo LETRATAG 100T User Manual
H2O Audio AMPHIBX WA E User Manual
Huey Chiao HCB22 User Manual
JBL GTO16T User Manual
JBL gto75 2 II User Manual
JBL GTO327 User Manual
JVC GR AXM800 User Manual
JVC GR DVL157 User Manual